Home

User Manual

1. ASCII hex ASCII code Key Scancode 00 NUL ALT right Make 39h 01 SOH ALT right Break FOh 39h 02 STX ALT left Make 19h 03 ETX ALT left Break FOh 19h 04 EOT CTRL left Make 11h 05 ENO CTRL left Break FOh 11h 06 ACK CTRL right Make 68h 07 BEL CTRL right Break FOh 58h 08 BS BS 66h 09 HT TAB right ODh 0A LF RIGHT arrow inner keypad 6Ah 0B VT TAB left ODh S 0C EE Enter inner keypad 79h 0D CR CR SAh 0E SO INSERT inner keypad 67h OF SI PAGE UP inner keypad Fh 10 DLE PAGE DOWN inner keypad 6Dh 11 DC1 HOME inner keypad Eh 12 DC2 LEFT arrow inner keypad 61h 13 DC3 DOWN arrow inner keypad 60h 14 DC4 UP arrow inner keypad 63h 15 NAK F6 2Fh 16 SYN F1 07h 17 ETB F2 OFh 18 CAN F3 17h 19 EM F4 1Fh 1A SUB F5 27h 1B ESC ESC 08h 1C FS F7 97h 1D GS F8 Fh 1E RS F9 47h 1F US F10 MFh Product Reference Guide Table E 5 Scanset 3 122 Key Function Key Map ASCII hex ASCII code Key Scancode 00 NUL X ALT Right Make 99h 01 SOH ALT Right Break FOh 39h 02 STX ALT left Make 19h 03 ETX ALT left Break FOh 19h 04 EOT CTRL left RESET Make only 11ih 05 ENQ CTRL left RESET Make Break 11h FOh 11h 06 ACK ONLINE Enter Make only b8h 07 BEL ONLINE Enter Make Break 58h FOh 58h 08 BS BS 66h 09 HT TAB right ODh
2. CABLE PACESETTER PLUS Product Reference Guide 6 135 Single Cable RS 232 RTS CTS Selection Specifies how RTS and CTS are used to control the data flow RTS is con trolled by the Scanner and can be continuously held high low or can be asserted during label transmission The scanner looks at CTS as the con figuration values state to determine when to send label data Choices are e Option 0 RIS is held in low state and CTS is ignored e Option 1 RIS is held in high state and CTS is ignored e Option 2 Assert RTS and wait for CTS to be asserted e Option 3 Assert RTS and ignore CTS e Option 4 RTS held low wait for CTS to be asserted e Option 5 RTS held high wait for CTS to be asserted To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan a bar code below or on the following pages representing the desired option You ll need to cover any unused bar codes as well as facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming seguence by scanning the SWITCH bar code RTS CTS SELECTION OPTION 0 ELECTION 6 136 Magellan 8300 8400 Single Cable RS 232 Options Single Cable RS 232 RTS CTS Selection continued Remember to cover any un
3. GREEN LED IDLE STATE ON DIM 6 32 MagellanTM 8300 8400 Indication Features Power up Beep Control Specifies the type of audible indication that is made when entering scan ner active mode on power up Choices are e No beep e One beep e Three beeps To set the Power up Beep 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the three bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code POWER OFF UP BEEP POWER UP B Product Reference Guide 6 33 ONE BEEP EEP Good Read Beep Control This feature enables disables scanner beep upon successfully decoding of a label To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the two bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code GOOD R EAD BEEP DISA 6 34 Magellan 8300 8400 EAD BEEP Indication Features Good Read Beep Frequency Adjusts the scanner s good read beep to sound at l
4. Interface Related Features Case Conversion continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan VERSION ONVERSION LOWER Product Reference Guide 6 87 IBM Features IBM Interface Options IBM interfaces offer specific control over interaction with certain devices The OEM USB interface provides its own set of options Refer to the feature OEM USB Scanner Device Type in this chapter NOTE Options for this feature are as follows e FULL host interface support Accepts scanner and scale config uration host commands Ignore host interface configuration of scanner and scale Ignores all scanner and scale configuration host commands To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code IBM INTERFACE OPTION FULL HOST INTERFACE SUPPORT IBM INTERFACE OPTION IGNORE HOST I F CONFIG OF SCANNER amp SCALE 6 88 Magellan 8300 8400
5. 6 18 Magellan 8300 8400 General Scanner Features Motor Timeout continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan MOTOR TIMEOUT 10 MINUTES MOTOR TIMEOUT 15 MINUTES Product Reference Guide 6 19 Motor Timeout continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan MOTOR TIMEOUT 30 MINUTES MOTOR TIMEOUT 60 MINUTES 6 20 Magellan 8300 8400 General Scanner Features Label Gone Timeout Specifies the amount of time that data segments are stored by the software before being discarded if a label has not been successfully decoded during the current label in volume session which is defined as the time between when the label gone time is first started until the label gone timer expires To set the Label Gone Timeout 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete t
6. 6 310 Magellan 8300 8400 Standard 2 of 5 Std 2 of 5 Enable Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission Enables disables transmission of an optional Standard 2 of 5 check charac ter This feature applies only when Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calcu lation is enabled NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION DISABLE STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6 311 Standard 2 of 5 Label ID This feature specifies a Standard 2 of 5 label ID to be added to bar code data 7 The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature Ik 2 Scan the SWITCH bar code Scan the bar code SET STANDARD 2 of 5 LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Sca
7. MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH 14 C 6 236 Magellan 8300 8400 Other UPC EAN Options UPC EAN Minimum Segment Length continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan UPC EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH 15 CHARACTERS Product Reference Guide 6 237 Addons Add ons or supplemental characters are commonly added to the end of UPC EAN bar codes The scanner will read the add ons if they are enabled and in the field of view Three add on types are supported 2 digit 5 digit and Code 128 add ons Supported options are None This option directs the scanner to ignore add on portion of a UPC EAN bar code but still read the main portion of the bar code 2 Digits The scanner will optionally read 2 digit add ons with the UPC EAN label 5 Digits The scanner will optionally read 5 digit add ons with the UPC EAN label Code 128 Add on The scanner will optionally read Code 128 add ons with the UPC EAN label i Contact Customer Support for advanced programming of optional and conditional add ons NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code representing the desired option on this and the following page You ll need to cover any unused bar
8. MINIMUM R EAN TWO LABEL EADS 4 6 230 Magellan 8300 8400 E Other UPC EAN Options UPC EAN Correlation This feature enables disables character correlation for UPC EAN To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code CORRELATION CORRELATION Product Reference Guide 6 231 UPC EAN Minimum Segment Length Specifies the minimum number of characters necessary in a UPC EAN JAN label segment in order for the scanner to accept a label for decoding Selectable from 5 to 15 characters To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming seguence by scanning the SWITCH bar MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH 5 C code PC EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH 6 CHARAC 6 232 Magellan 8300 8400 Other UPC EAN Options
9. 6 128 Magellan 8300 8400 Single Cable RS 232 Options Single Cable RS 232 Options The RS 232 Single Cable interface shares some configuration options with other RS 232 interfaces Rather than repeat them in this chapter as Single Cable options please find them referenced as follows RS 232 Baud Rate on page 96 RS 232 Number of Data Bits on page 100 RS 232 Number of Stop Bits on page 101 RS 232 Parity on page 102 RS 232 Software Flow Control on page 108 RS 232 Beep After Weigh on page 117 RS 232 Beep on Not on File on page 118 Product Reference Guide 6 129 Single Cable RS 232 Scanner Only Protocol This sets the type of interface protocol that will be used in Single Cable RS 232 Options are Scanner scale RS 232 protocol Scanner only RS 232 protocol To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code below representing the desired option You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SINGLE CABLE RS 232 PROTOCOL SCAN SINGLE CABLE RS 232 PROTOCOL 6 130 Magellan 8300 8400 Single Cable RS 232 Options Single Cable RS 232 Stale Weight Timeout Specifies the amount of time i
10. Product Reference Guide 6 327 Codabar Require Quiet Zones When enabled this feature requires that quiet zones margins be present for Codabar labels When disabled quiet zones are optional To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code REQUIRE QUIET ZONES DISABLE 6 328 Magellan 8300 8400 R REQUIRE QUIET ZONES Codabar Enable Codabar Length Control This feature specifies whether variable length or fixed length decoding will be set for Codabar To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code iz You must now set the features Codabar Length 1 and Codabar Length 2 CODABAR LENGTH CONTROL VARIABLE LENGTH NOTE CODABAR LENGTH CONTROL FIXED LENGTH
11. POS Terminal Remote Display Scale Host EAS PORT AUXILIARY PORT POWER POS TERMINAL REMOTE DISPLAY SCALE HOST Connection to external EAS device Controls EAS deactivation system Test Port On Screen Programming OSP Application Download RS 232 Handheld Scanner Input Auxiliary RS 232 Label Data Output AC Brick Input OR Power off Terminal POT Brick Input Label Data Scale Data for single cable interfaces Application Download where appropriate Drives Remote Display Scale Data dual cable scanner scale Connection to this port is Optional Models with scale only Dual cable units only Scale connection may be handled through POS Terminal port Magellan 8300 8400 Physical Parameters Physical Parameters This chapter provides specifications for performance environmental and electrical parameters Reference Chapter 2 Site Preparation and Installa tion for physical measurements of all models and some accessories Scanning The scanner has a scan zone between the two windows where the scanner projects laser light in order to scan items Two separate projections one from the horizontal window and one from the vertical window combine to form a zone where bar code labels are read Refer to Chapter 3 Scan ning Items for more informatio
12. Product Reference Guide 6 329 Codabar Length 1 Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode or the first fixed length if in fixed length mode see Codabar Length Control Length includes the barcode s check and data characters To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET CODABAR LENGTH 1 below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired label length The selectable range for this option is 003 to 050 Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 003 050 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code ABAR LEN SET COD GTH 1 6 330 Magellan 8300 8400 Codabar Enable Codabar Length 2 Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode or the second fixed length if in fixed length mode see Codabar Length Control Length includes the barcode s check and data characters To set this feature i 2 Scan the SWITCH bar code Scan the bar code SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Scan the appropriate digits from
13. Product Reference Guide 6 167 UPC A 5 Digit Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies a UPC A 5 Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data n NOTE The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled To set this feature Ju 2 Scan the SWITCH bar code Scan the bar code SET UPC A 5 DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 T and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET UPC A 5 DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID 6 168 Magellan 8300 8400 UPC A Enable UPC A 128 Supplemental Label ID m NOTE This feature specifies a UPC A 12
14. 5 MINIM Product Reference Guide 6 319 Codabar Enable Enables disables the ability of the scanner to decode Codabar labels To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code CODABAR DISABLE CODABAR ENABLE 6 320 Magellan 8300 8400 Codabar Enable Codabar Start Stop Character Transmission Enables disables transmission of Codabar start and stop characters To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION Product Reference Guide 6 321 Codabar Start Stop Character Set This feature selects the format of transmitted Codabar start stop charac ters Options are e ABCD TN E e ABCD ABCD e abcd tn e e abcd abcd To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH
15. Product Reference Guide 6 179 UPC E 128 Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies a UPC E 128 Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data E The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature 1s 2 Scan the SWITCH bar code Scan the bar code SET UPC E 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the fac ing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 T and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET UPC E 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID 6 180 Magellan 8300 8400 UPC E Enable UPC E Minimum Reads Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a UPC E label must be decoded befor
16. SET RS 232 ACK CHARACTER Product Reference Guide 6 121 RS 232 NAK Character This feature specifies which ASCII character will be used as a NAK char n NOTE acter DO NOT set this feature to use previously defined characters such as XON XOFF or host commands as this will conflict with normal operation of these characters 8 bit data is not recognized when the feature RS 232 Number of Data Bits is set to 7 data bits To specify the RS 232 NAK Character I 2 Scan the SWITCH bar code Scan the bar code SET RS 232 NAK CHARACTER below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the hex designation for the desired character A table contain ing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for the desired character For example if ASCII A were the desired NAK character you would scan the digits 4 then 1 the ASCII corre sponding hex value The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits characters have been scanned SET RS 232 NAK CHARACTER 6 12
17. Wincor RS 232 Keybd RS 232 Nixdorf Single Wedge IBM OEM USB Cable Single Cable RS 232 Use BCC Disable Single Cable RS 232 Disable Use ACK NAK Single Cable RS 232 Use STX Enable Set Single Cable RS S 232 STX Character Set Single Cable RS Enable 232 ETX Character Set Single Cable RS CR 232 ETX Character Keyboard Interface US Keyboard Layout Keyboard Interface Quiet Interval ene Keyboard Interface Caps lock Caps Lock State OFF Keyboard Interface Keyboard Simulation DE Keyboard Interface Control Characters DRA Keyboard Interface 18 mst Intercharacter Delay Coupon Control Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable UPC A Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable UPC A Number Sys tem Character Trans Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable mission F 6 Magellan 8300 8400 Wincor RS 232 Keybd plemental Label ID RS 232 Nixdorf Single Wedge IBM OEM USB Cable UPC A Check Char Enable Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable acter Transmission Expand UPC A to EAN 13 Disable Enable Disable Disable Disable Disable UPC A Label ID A A A A UPC A 2 Digit Sup plemental Label ID A n a a UPC A 5 Digit Sup plemental Label ID i 7 UPC A 128 Supple mental Label ID A A A A UPC A Minimum Reads 1 1 1 1 1 1
18. MSI PLESSEY NUMBER OF CHECK CHARACTERS 2 Product Reference Guide 6 347 MSI Plessey Check Character Transmission Enables disables transmission of optional MSI Plessey check characters iz This feature applies only when MSI Plessey Check Character Calcula tion is enabled NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SEY CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION SEY CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSIO 6 348 Magellan 8300 8400 MSI Plessey Enable MSI Plessey Label ID This feature specifies an MSI Plessey label ID to be added to bar code data The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET MSI PLESSEY LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropri
19. Product Reference Guide 6 289 Code 128 Length 1 Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode or the first fixed length if in fixed length mode see Code 128 Length Control Length includes the barcode s check and data characters To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET CODE 128 LENGTH 1 below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired label length The selectable range for this option is 001 to 080 Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 001 080 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET C 6 290 Magellan 8300 8400 GTH 1 ODE 128 LEN Code 128 Enable Code 128 Length 2 Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode or the second fixed length if in fixed length mode see Code 128 Length Con trol Length includes the barcode s check and data characters To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET CODE 128 LENGTH 2 below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Ap
20. Product Reference Guide 6 175 Expand UPC E to EAN 13 Enables disables expansion of UPC E labels to EAN JAN 13 To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code PC E TO EAN JAN 13 DISABLE UPC E TO EAN JAN 13 6 176 Magellan 8300 8400 UPC E Enable UPC E Label ID This feature specifies a UPC E label ID to be added to bar code data The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET UPC E LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each characte
21. 6 350 Magellan 8300 8400 MSI Plessey Enable MSI Plessey Length 1 Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode or the first fixed length if in fixed length mode see MSI Plessey Length Con trol Length includes the barcode s check and data characters To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET MSI PLESSEY LENGTH 1 below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired label length The selectable range for this option is 004 to 016 Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 004 016 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code Product Reference Guide 6 351 MSI PLESSEY LENGT MSI Plessey Length 2 Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode or the second fixed length if in fixed length mode see Code 93 Length Control Length includes the barcode s check and data characters To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET CODE 93 LENGTH 2 below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriat
22. DataBar Expanded Enable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable DataBar Expanded EAN 128 Emulation Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable DataBar Expanded Label ID RX RX RX DataBar Expanded Length Control Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable DataBar Expanded Length 1 DataBar Expanded Length 2 74 74 74 74 74 74 DataBar Expanded Minimum Reads Code 39 Enable Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Code 39 Start Stop Character Transmis sion Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Product Reference Guide F 11 RS 232 Wincor Keybd RS 232 Nixdorf Single Wedge IBM OEM USB Cable Code 39 Check Cha pe Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable acter Calculation Code 39 Check Ghar Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable acter Transmission Code 39 Full ASCII Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Code 39 Label ID M B1 i kode 39 Require Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Quiet Zones Code 38 Length Can Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable trol Code 39 Length 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 Code 39 Length 2 50 50 50 50 50 50 Code 39 Correlation Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Code 39 Stitching Enable Enable
23. F 2 Magellan 8300 8400 RS 232 Wincor Keybd RS 232 Nixdorf Single Wedge IBM OEM USB Cable Mumbar i Host 2 buffers 1 buffer 2 buffers 2 buffers 1 buffer 1 buffer Transmission Buffers AIM ID Disable Disable Disable Disable Label ID Control Enable as Enable as Enable as Enable as prefix prefix prefix prefix Global Prefix 00 00 00 00 0D00 0D00 0D00 Global Suffix lt CR gt lt CR gt 00 lt CR gt No con No con No con No con No con No con Case Conversion l i version version version version version version 10 Full Host Full Host IBM Interface Options custom Interface Interface options Support Support IBM Number of Host 6 6 Resets IBM Scale Address 6E 6E IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format a DID IBM Label Slicing Slice Slice Control whennec when nec IBM Maximum Label Slice Length a a OEM USB Scanner Table top Device Type scanner RS 232 Baud Rate 9600 9600 9600 RS 232 Mu 8databits 8databits 7 data bits Data Bits Product Reference Guide F 3 Wincor RS 232 Keybd RS 232 Single IBM OEM USB Nixdorf Cable Wedge RS 232 Number of Stop Bits 1 stop bit 1 stop bit 1 stop bit RS 232 Parity None Odd Odd RS 232 Hardware Disable Enable Control CTS flow RS 232 Intercharac None None ter Delay eee Disable Disable Disabl
24. and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET CODE 39 LABEL ID 6 272 Magellan 8300 8400 Code 39 Enable Code 39 Require Quiet Zones When enabled this feature requires that quiet zones margins be present for Code 39 labels When disabled quiet zones are optional To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH E 39 REQUIRE QUIET ZONES DISABLE bar code Product Reference Guide 6 273 REQUIRE QUIET ZONES Code 39 Length Control This feature specifies whether variable length or fixed length decoding will be set for Code 39 To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code You must now set the features Code 39 Le
25. Scanner Installation 1 Mount the horizontal surface of the scanner flush with the counter top to encourage slide scanning rather than lifting 2 Position the centerline of the scanner read area 8 10 inches 20 3 25 4 cm from the edge of the checkstand cashier side Scanner Maintenance 1 Keep scanner windows clean This will improve productivity and reduce rescans 2 Replace scanner glass when excessive scratches are evident References Anonymous 1992 Ergonomic Improvement of Scanning Checkstand Designs Food Marketing Institute 800 Connecticut Ave N W Washington D C 20006 Grant Katharyn A et al 1992 Ergonomic Evaluation of Checkstand Designs in the Retail Food Industry National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health 4676 Columbia Parkway Cincinnati Ohio 45226 Scanner Usage 1 Minimize handling of heavy bulky products Leave these items in the cart and use an alternative entry method such as key entry of short PLUs or handheld scanning 2 Regularly train cashiers in proper scanning methods and ergonomics principles such as Product Reference Guide 2 5 Develop a smooth fluid motion during scanning sharing work equally between hands Use the entire hand for grasping and lifting items Since the scanner reads labels on all four sides plus the top and bottom there is no need to turn a bar code toward either of the scanner windows Develop effici
26. oAUALOGIC Magellan 8300 8400 Product Reference Guide Datalogic Scanning Inc 959 Terry Street Eugene Oregon 97402 USA Telephone 541 683 5700 Fax 541 345 7140 An Unpublished Work All rights reserved No part of the contents of this documentation or the procedures described therein may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written permis sion of Datalogic Scanning Inc or its subsidiaries or affiliates Datalogic or Datalogic Scanning Owners of Datalogic products are hereby granted a non exclusive revocable license to reproduce and transmit this docu mentation for the purchaser s own internal business purposes Purchaser shall not remove or alter any proprie tary notices including copyright notices contained in this documentation and shall ensure that all notices appear on any reproductions of the documentation Should future revisions of this manual be published you can acquire printed versions by contacting your Data logic representative Electronic versions may either be downloadable from the Datalogic website www scan ning datalogic com or provided on appropriate media If you visit our website and would like to make comments or suggestions about this or other Datalogic publications please let us know via the Contact Data logic page Disclaimer Datalogic has taken reasonable measures to provide information in this manual that is complete and accurate however
27. the follow ing should be performed Scan the Switch label Scan the Set Code 39 Label ID label Scan 5 Scan 2 Scan 3 Product Reference Guide 6 79 Label ID Control continued Scan 4 Scan 0 Scan 0 Scan 0 Scan 0 Scan the Switch label Figure 6 2 Label ID Position Options SCANNER Prefix Label ID Aim ID Bar Code Data Label ID Suffix of ee ee m e Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan L ID TRANSMISSION D BEL ID TRANSMISSION BEFORE BAR CODE 6 80 Magellan 8300 8400 Interface Related Features Label ID Control continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan ABEL ID TRANSMISSION AFTER BAR CODE DATA Product Reference Guide 6 81 Global Prefix This feature specifies the prefix that is added to beginning of label trans mission To specify the Global Prefix Character s 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET GLOBAL PREFIX below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes to ensure the scanner reads on
28. Enables disables the ability of the scanner to substitute a guard pattern for even parity 6 when an EAN 8 JAN 8 label is presented To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code JAN 8 GUARD SUBSTITUTION DIS AN 8 GUARD SUBSTITUTION 8 J 6 198 MagellanTM 8300 8400 EAN 8 Enable EAN 8 JAN 8 Both Guards Substitution Enables disables the ability of the scanner to find an EAN JAN8 guard pattern in cases where the EAN JAN8 margin makes the guard look like a character To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code 8 BOTH GUARDS SUBSTITUTION N 8 JAN 8 BOTH GUARDS SUBSTITUTION ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6 199
29. MINIMUM Code 93 Enable Enables disables the ability of the scanner to decode Code 93 labels To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code CODE 93 DISABLE CODE 93 ENABLE 6 336 Magellan 8300 8400 Code 93 Enable Code 93 Label ID This feature specifies a Code 93 label ID to be added to bar code data The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET CODE 93 LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and
30. Magellan 8300 8400 EAN 13 Enable EAN 13 5 Digit Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies an EAN 13 5 Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET EAN 13 5 DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET EAN 13 5 DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6 189 EAN 13 128 Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies an EAN 13 128 Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code
31. Product Reference Guide 6 115 RS 232 Beep on ASCII BEL Enables disables ability of scanner to beep sound a good read tone on receiving an ASCII BEL 07 hex e Disable Enable To enable disable this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code ON ASCII RS 232 BEEP ON ASCII B ENABLE 6 116 Magellan 8300 8400 RS 232 Features RS 232 Beep After Weigh Enables disables the ability of the scanner to beep after weight data is transmitted to the host Scale interfaces that support this item are RS 232 ICL RS 232 SASI and RS 232 Single Cable To enable disable the Beep After Weigh feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code BEEP AFTER WEIGH BEEP AFTER WEIGH Product Reference Guide 6 117 RS 232 Beep on Not on File Select for the host to beep or not when a not on file condition is det
32. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired label length A setting of 000 will ignore this length only one fixed length otherwise the selectable range for this option is 001 to 050 Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 001 050 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code ANDARD 2 OF 5L Product Reference Guide 6 315 Standard 2 of 5 Correlation This feature enables disables character correlation for Standard 2 of 5 To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code D 2 of 5 CORRELATION D 2 of 5 CORRELATION 6 316 Magellan 8300 8400 Standard 2 of 5 Std 2 of 5 Enable Standard 2 of 5 Stitching Enables disables stitching for Standard 2 of 5 labels When parts of a Stan dard 2 of 5 bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner s software and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar
33. blink of the green light blinking at a 2 second rate To wake up the unit press anywhere on the weigh platter scanner scale models only press the Volume Selection switch or wave your hand over the horizontal window The unit will recognize any of these signals as a wake up call and instantly return to Normal Opera tion Additional Functions Additional scanner and scale functions include programming running scanner or scale diagnostics initiating a reset zeroing the scale and cali brating the scale Programming When your scanner or scanner scale is shipped from the factory it is con figured to work with the POS system interface at your store and read the bar code symbologies you designated If you need to change this configu ration information for any reason Chapter 6 Programming contains special bar code labels for changing the unit s settings Diagnostic Mode Refer to Chapter 2 Diagnostic Modes for details about running scan ner and scale diagnostics Turn to Chapter 4 Problem Isolation for a description of error codes resulting from diagnostics 3 8 Magellan 8300 8400 Additional Functions Scanner and Scale Reset The reset procedures and indicators are identical for scanner and scanner scale models As with any electronic equipment it is sometimes necessary to reset the electronics The reset procedure allows you to initiate a reset command to the scanner This may be necessary if the POS te
34. 0A LF RIGHT arrow inner keypad 6Ah 0B VT TAB left ODh S 0C FF CR FIELD EXIT Make only 5Ah FOh 5Ah 0D CR CR FIELD EXIT Make Break bAh 0E SO INSERT inner keypad 65h OF SI FIELD 79h 10 DLE FIELD Ch 11 DC1 HOME inner keypad 62h 12 DC2 LEFT arrow inner keypad 61h 13 DC3 DOWN arrow inner keypad 60h 14 DC4 _UP arrow inner keypad 63h 15 NAK F6 2Fh 16 SYN Fi 07h 17 ETB F2 OFh 18 CAN F3 17h 19 EM F4 1Fh 1A SUB F5 27h 1B ESC ESC 08h 1C FS F7 97h 1D GS F8 BFh AE RS F9 47h 1F US F10 AFh E 6 Magellan 8300 8400 Keyboard Model Cross Reference Table E 6 Japanese DOS Function Key Map ASCII value ASCII code Key Scancode 00h NUL ALT right Make 31h 01h SOH ALT right Break Bih 02h STX ALT left Make 31h 03h ETX ALT left Break Bih 04h EOT CTRL left Make 41h 05h ENQ CTRL left Break C1h 06h ACK CTRL right Make 41h 07h BEL CTRL right Break Cih 08h BS BS 3Eh 09h HT TAB right 3Ch 0Ah LF RIGHT arrow inner keypad 4Dh 0Bh VT TAB left 3Ch S OCh FF Enter right keypad 60h ODh CR CR 3Bh 0Eh SO INSERT inner keypad 52h OFh SI PAGE UP inner keypad 49h 10h DLE PAGE DOWN inner keypad 51h 11h DC1 HOME inner keypad 4Ch 12h DC2 LEFT arrow inner keypad 4Bh 13h DC3 DOWN arrow inner keypad 4Ah 14h DC4 UP arrow inner keypad 4Eh 15h NAK F6 6Dh 16h SYN F1 68h 17h ETB F2 69h 18h CAN F3 6Ah 19h E
35. 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET CODE 93 LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6 337 Code 93 Length Control This feature specifies whether variable length or fixed length decoding will be set for Code 93 To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming seguence by scanning the SWITCH bar code IZ You must now set the features Code 93 Length 1 and Code 93 Length 2 CODE 93 LENGTH CONTROL VARIABLE LENGTH NOTE CODE 93 LENGTH CONTROL FIXED LENGTH 6 338 Magellan 8300 8400 Code 93 Enable Code 93 Length 1 Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode or the first fixed length if in fixed length mode see Code 93 Length Control Length includes the barcode s check and data characters To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET CODE 93 LENGTH 1 below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scan
36. Calibrating the Scale Pounds amp Kilograms Figure 5 1 Calibration Switch Access Calibration Switch Press and release the Calibration Switch to place the scanner scale in Calibration Mode The scanner scale will sound a tone indicating it is in Calibration Mode If the motor was spinning when you initi ated Calibration Mode the motor will stop and the Yellow LED will begin flashing indicating the scale is in Calibration Mode The dis play will show the message ESCL empty scale Reinstall the weigh platter Press the Zero Push Button The Yellow LED will go out for approximately 10 seconds or less and the Remote Display will alternately display and 22 _ until the scale is ready to proceed When the scale is ready the Yellow LED will begin blinking again and the display will show the message Ad20 add twenty pounds or Ad10 add ten kilograms The scanner scale will also sound one tone if the scale is weighing in kilograms or two tones for pounds Place the correct weight twenty pounds for calibration in pounds or ten kilograms for metric calibration from the Field Standard Weight set on the center of the weighing area and press the Zero Push Button again Product Reference Guide 8 The Yellow LED will extinguish for approximately 10 seconds and the Remote Displ
37. EAN 8 Stitch Exact Label Halves When enabled this allows the scanner the ability to stitch exact EAN 8 label haves with no overlapping characters To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code EAN 8 STITCH EXACT LABEL HALVES DISABLE STITCH EXACT LABEL HALVES 6 200 Magellan 8300 8400 EAN 8 Enable EAN 8 Stitch Unlike Label Halves When enabled this allows the scanner the ability to stitch two EAN 8 label halves together that may contain differing characters To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH STITCH UNLIKE LABEL HALVES DISA bar code Product Reference Guide 6 201 TITCH UNLIKE LABEL HALVES EAN 8 Label ID This feature specifies an
38. Interleaved 2 of 5 I 2 of 5 Enable I 2 of 5 Length 1 Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode or the first fixed length if in fixed length mode see 2 of 5 Length Control Length includes the barcode s check and data characters To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET I 2 of 5 LENGTH 1 below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired label length The selectable range for this option is 002 to 050 even numbers only Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 002 050 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code of 5 SET 2 of 5 LENGTH 1 Product Reference Guide 6 303 I 2 of 5 Length 2 Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode or the second fixed length if in fixed length mode see 2 of 5 Length Control Length includes the barcode s check and data characters To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET I 2 of 5 LENGTH 2 below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in App
39. MagellanTM 8300 8400 Manual Overview Manual Conventions NOTE blocks contain information that is helpful and rec iz ommended They provide information that is critical to operations and or procedures described in this manual LEGAL NOTE blocks indicate procedures or activities which may be regulated under law by governmental agencies It is your responsibility to ensure compliance with the regulations that govern installation of weighing devices CAUTION blocks inform you that proper handling adherence to the procedures described is required to avoid damage to equipment and or property injury These statements do not include potentially fatal hazards which would be designated as DANGER blocks Use of this product does not warrant the need for a DANGER block I WARNING blocks alert you to potential physical harm or Product Reference Guide 1 3 Technical Support Datalogic Website Support The Datalogic website www scanning datalogic com is the complete source for technical support and information for Datalogic products The site offers the Datalogic TekForum product support product registration warranty information product manuals product tech notes software updates demos and instructions for returning products for repair Datalogic Website TekForum Search for information on the TekForum by clicking on the Support link on the Datalogic home pa
40. UPC EAN Minimum Segment Length continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan NIMUM SEGMENT 7 CHARACT MINIMUM SEGMENT Product Reference Guide 6 233 UPC EAN Minimum Segment Length continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan UPC EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH 9 CHARACTERS MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH 10 C 6 234 Magellan 8300 8400 Other UPC EAN Options UPC EAN Minimum Segment Length continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan UPC EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH 11 CHARACTE MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH 12 C Product Reference Guide 6 235 UPC EAN Minimum Segment Length continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan UPC EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH 13 CHARACTER
41. total length including prefix must be 19 Example F110123456789112345 EAN 13 with Code 128 Supplemental Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor rect Supplemental data is appended to base label Prefix must be an ASCII character F total length including prefix must be greater or equal to 20 code 128 Supplemental codes are variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters Characters immediately following base label must be of the form 8100 8101 or 8102 Example F11012345678918100000951 MagellanTM 8300 8400 Code 39 Check character must be included in label data Label length including start stop and check characters and exclud ing prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner s fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type Start and stop characters must be included in label x Prefix must be an ASCII character Example Code 39 TEST Code 39 Pharmacode Check character must be included in label data Label length including start stop and check characters and exclud ing prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner s fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type Start and stop characters must be included in label Prefix must be an ASCII character p Example p 123456789 I20f5 Check character must be included in label data Label
42. 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code HOST TRANSMISSION B F HOST TRANSMISSION BUFFERS 6 76 Magellan 8300 8400 Interface Related Features AIM ID AIM label identifiers as opposed to custom characters you select yourself as with label identifiers can be included with scanned bar code data AIM label identifiers consist of three characters as follows e A close brace character ASCII followed by A code character see the table below followed by e A modifier character the modifier character is symbol dependent SYMBOLOGY CHAR SYMBOLOGY CHAR UPC EAN E MSI Plessey M Code 39 A PDF 417 L DataBar Omnidirectional DE F DataBar Expanded RSS g Interleaved 2 of 5 Standard 2 of 5 S Code 93 G ISBN xa Code 128 EAN 128 C a ISBN X with a 0 modifier character Figure 6 1 AIM ID SCANNER Prefix Label ID Bar Code Data Label ID Product Reference Guide 6 77 AIM ID continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan AIM ID DISABLE AIM ID ENABLE 6 78 Magellan 8300 8400 Interface Related Features Label ID Control NOTE A Label ID is used to identify a barc
43. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET DataBar Expanded LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6 261 DataBar Expanded Length Control This feature specifies either variable length or fixed length decoding for DataBar Expanded To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code iz You must now set the features DataBar Expanded Length 1 and Data Bar Expanded Length 2 DataBar Expanded LENGTH CONTROL VARIABL NOTE DataBar Expanded LENGTH CONTROL 6 262 Magellan 8300 8400 DataBar Expanded Enable DataBar Expanded Length 1 Length 1 is the minimum label l
44. Codabar Length l uei nnn 6 330 Codabar Length 2 sac cewssvaiacensacesnsnnnpemadacgemons dacs Od TT AOEDD UR TU DDR EM FERE 6 331 Codabar CorrelatiOl seen nA i sade reca Aa dd Ad CiO RTH Y ACER A iN EY RG RG 6 332 Codabar Stitcnill0 secseneeisscecnaterdansmanegecaauonanseerenonsamensmenenamadacedeuas ues GDC UDINE E ER EU 6 333 Codabar Minimum Reads liun GR OR odd idda ELLA OR A DAD DG E 6 334 Code 93 Enabler FA Gi Gi Tw Od AG ey eal LG GO GLM 6 336 Code 93 Label MD qc APER 6 337 Code 93 Length GOmtrol iz intasscuts Se Rai TI YR GE IO AGY DRE ROD nE 6 338 C d e 93 Length ol sisscssene sese poto qu MER ER HAEEDENU DRADDODI CGG O SUD Nn DANN ERMIE KE 6 339 Code OS MENGE 2 anu nia YRR acto uie s a P ida MOM M RN RI DRIN MONDE MEME 6 340 Gode 93 Correlation sane i IO GA a NR E Ra URDU niece E eased dential LEG 6 341 Code 93 SHECHHDG ee EET 6 342 Product Reference Guide vii Code 93 Minimum Reads seis GEIR I RR PRG S EPU RQDIR Ie DCN R teamed dd AG DON 6 343 MSI Plessey Enable 1 5 pte Even doo REOR RG UR RG DR ARUM RA FR DO GADW RUP PURUS 6 345 MSI Plessey Check Character Calculation sei buu WE Gau becas ek e Ra n DE Y bb aiaa 6 346 MSI Plessey N rmiber of Check Characters ues aceto ene desine taire rade ae RA TC GW SN RF 6 347 MSI Pl ssey Check Character TransmisslOD usxcxsexueekairecessdtsbsestaa qus bres Gb qa Ups AR 6 348 MSI Plessey Label ID 4 5 exu eeeecsissn ponti ra ERR RER RR ARON A ERYRIn ARR GRY DRAG RS A
45. Model Type VFID mission Set Ma Country Protocol P Mode Support PC XT Foreign ALT Mode Wedge A PC XT ScanSet1 No No AT PS 2 25 286 PS 2 30 286 PS 2 50 507 Wedge B AT PS2 ScanSet2 No No PS 2 60 70 80 90 95 Foreign ALT Mode PS 2 25 and 30 Foreign ALT Mode Wedge C AT PS2 Scan Set 1 No No PC XT U S Mode Wedge D PC XT ScanSet1 Yes No AT PS 2 25 286 PS 2 30 286 PS 2 50 50Z Wedge E AT PS2 ScanSet2 Yes Yes PS 2 60 70 80 90 95 U S Mode specific country support PS 2 25 and 30 U S Mode Wedge F AT PS2 Scan Set 1 Yes No IBM 3xxx Terminals 122 key keyboard Wedge G AT PS2 Scan Set 3 Yes No IBM 3xxx Terminals 102 key keyboard Wedge H AT PS2 Scan Set3 Yes No PS55 5530T with Japanese UAPANESE DOS bos edge ATPS2 pos Yes No NEC 9801 Wedge J Ade NEC 9801 Yes No E 2 Magellan 8300 8400 Keyboard Model Cross Reference Table E 2 Scanset 1 Function Key Map ps ASCII code Key Scancode 00 NUL ALT right Make EOh 38h 01 SOH ALT right Break EOh B8h 02 STX ALT left Make 98h 03 ETX ALT left Break B8h 04 EOT CTRL left Make 1Dh 05 ENQ CTRL left Break Dh 06 ACK CTRL right Make EOh 1Dh 07 BEL CTRL right Break EOh 9Dh 08 BS BS OEh 09 HT TAB right OFh 0A LF RIGHT arrow inner keypad 4Dh EO 0B VT TAB left OFh S 0C FF Enter inner keypad 1Ch EO 0D CR CR 1Ch 0E SO INSERT inner keyp
46. Volume Tone Push Button for 8 seconds If unexpected data is being sent from the host to the scanner consider enabling the programmable feature Ignore Host Commands to debug the system scanner pass the data to the POS Go to No Transmit to POS flowchart Call Tech Support scanner read satisfactorily pi Verify programmable parameters using the information and programming bar codes provided in Section 6 Check bar code symbology options and other configurable features Does the scanner read satisfactorily Troubleshoot the host or call Tech Support 1 Green and Yellow LEDs and beeper indications are configurable features Behavior may vary from that described here 4 10 Magellan 8300 8400 Flowcharts Figure 4 5 Problem Isolation No Transmit to POS NO TRANSMIT TO POS START Check the interface I F cable connections If possible retest the system using a known good I F cable Does the scanner pass the data to the POS Verify programmable parameters using the information and programming bar codes provided in Section 6 Check interface and I F options inactive symbologies and other configurable features Does the scanner read satisfactorily Troubleshoot the host or call Tech Support Product Reference Guide 4 11 Figure 4 6 Problem Isolation Scale SCALE START View the Remote Display and or the Yellow scale status LED for the
47. character Pad all numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 001 127 Thus to set a single character value of A bar codes containing the digits 0 6 and 5 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any decimal value from 001 to 127 The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned SET SINGLE CABLE RS 232 STX CHARACTER 6 142 Magellan 8300 8400 Single Cable RS 232 Options Set Single Cable RS 232 ETX Character Allows selection of the ETX character To specify the ETX Character 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET SINGLE CABLE RS 232 ETX CHARAC TER below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate characters digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the decimal designation for the desired character A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding decimal values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning decimal digits for each character Pad all numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 001 127 Thus to set a single character value of A bar codes containing the digits 0 6 and 5 must be scanned The selectable range
48. ergonomically sound installation allows items to be directed within easy reach and a scanning area requiring no lifting or special orientation of items If you havent already read the information at the beginning of this chapter titled Pre Installation Considerations please do so before continuing these instructions The symmetrical design of the scanner permits the operator to easily pass items from one hand to the other while scanning either from right to left or left to right With the unique 360 scan zone scanning is accom plished in one fluid motion The operator simply slides the item from the conveyor belt or diverter area through the scanning area and passes the item to the other hand which in turn bags it or places it on a take away conveyor belt Movement should flow naturally over the surface of the scanner Note that the following guidelines for preparing an existing checkstand to accept a scanner or incorporating the unit into a new checkstand design will not be accurate for all installations Although these guidelines will suf fice for most standard installations the installer may need to make adjust ments for varying counter heights and thicknesses support design or other checkstand limitations Figure 2 7 shows a typical left hand take away checkstand design Follow these basic steps to install the unit 1 Select a position for the scanner that offers a smooth product flow which best accommodates the reachi
49. then volume increases on subse quent press es Four volume levels are available Momentary when scanner is awake Press the push button for approximately 2 seconds then release Each time this is done the beeper will sound at one of three tones Stop when the desired tone high medium or low is sounded Hold then release when the beeper Increments tone sounds This mode allows system support personnel to trouble shoot problems with the scanner Upon entering Scan ner Diagnostic Mode view the 7 segment display to view Interface Type Bootloader Version Number Appli 4 Seconds Scanner Diagnostics Mode cation Version Number and Configuration File Number This mode is used to determine if a scanner can read bar codes Press the button for eight seconds or cycle power to exit Scanner Diagnostics Mode and reset the scanner 8 Seconds Resets Scanner Only system support personnel should perform a reset a Diagnostics Mode is meant for use by trained systems support personnel Users should not need to ini tiate this function under normal circumstances b Users should not perform scanner resets except under the direction of trained systems support person nel A 4 Magellan 8300 8400 Controls and Indicators Scale Zero Push Button The Scale Zero Push Button is used for multiple functions as listed in Table A 3 The Scale Zero Push Button has no function in a scanner only
50. 2 There are a total of six flag digits corresponding to the six types Checking applies depending upon which type is enabled 6 218 Magellan 8300 8400 Other UPC EAN Options Price Weight Check continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan CHECK 4 DIGIT PRICE WEIGHT PRICE WEIGHT CHECK 5 DIGIT PRICE WEIGHT Product Reference Guide 6 219 Price Weight Check continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan GHT CHECK 4 DIGIT EUROPEAN PRICE WEIGHT EIGHT CHEC GIT EUROPEAN PRICE WEIGHT 6 220 Magellan 8300 8400 Other UPC EAN Options In Store Label Minimum Reads Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an In Store label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming sequence by scanning
51. 39 Enable Enables disables the ability of the scanner to decode Code 39 labels To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code CODE 39 DISABLE CODE 39 ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6 267 Code 39 Start Stop Character Transmission Enables disables transmission of Code 39 start and stop characters This feature applies only when Code 39 Check Character Calculation is enabled NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code TART STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION TART STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSIO 6 268 Magellan 8300 8400 Code 39 Enable Code 39 Check Character Calculation Enables disables calculation and verification of an optional Code 39 check character When disabled any check character in label is treated as a data character Iv If
52. 5598070 5602376 5608201 5608399 5612529 5629510 5635699 5641958 5646391 5661435 5664231 5666045 5671374 5675138 5682028 5686716 5696370 5703347 5705802 5714750 5717194 5723852 5750976 5767502 5770847 5786581 5786585 5787103 5789732 5796222 5804809 5814803 5814804 5821721 5822343 5825009 5834708 5834750 5837983 5837988 5852286 5864129 5869827 5874722 5883370 5905249 5907147 5923023 5925868 5929421 5945670 5959284 5962838 5979769 6000619 6006991 6012639 6016135 6024284 6041374 6042012 6045044 6047889 6047894 6056198 6065676 6069696 6073849 6073851 6094288 6112993 6129279 6129282 6134039 6142376 6152368 6152372 6155488 6166375 6169614 6173894 6176429 6188500 6189784 6213397 6223986 6230975 6230976 6244510 6259545 6260763 6266175 6273336 6276605 6279829 6290134 6290135 6293467 6303927 6311895 6318634 6328216 6332576 6332577 6343741 6454168 6478224 6568598 6578765 6705527 6857567 6974084 6991169 7051940 7170414 7172123 7201322 7204422 e 7215493 7224540 7234641 7243850 7374092 7407096 7490770 7495564 7506816 7527198 7527207 7537166 7562817 601 26 118 6 e AU703547 D312631 D313590 e D320011 e D320012 e D323492 D330707 D330708 D349109 D350127 D350735 D351149 D351150 D352936 D35
53. 5V Out 3 External Read Indicator When configured signifies good read E oe Product Reference Guide B 9 NOTES B 10 Magellan 8300 8400 Appendix C Keypad Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits characters from a keypad Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 0 1 Product Reference Guide C 1 Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits characters from a keypad Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 2 3 C 2 Magellan 8300 8400 Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits characters from a keypad Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 4 5 Product Reference Guide C 3 Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits characters from a keypad Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar
54. 6 223 EAN Two Label Combined Transmission i2 airo io su renta AG RE RIGR RYD NIL OU DRE FPE 6 224 UPC EAN Guard IriSertioh 5 3 iU RODD LL AAG FR NM Rc EOD MU lube ORG GOR A 6 225 UPC EAN Stitch Exact Label FlalV amp S ae n ete arenis qeu uc iU an ER D REP OF A uev pse CRM EDITI 6 226 UPC EAN Sbitch Unlie EabeldialVGs he se ci ccs asazicseuisnsuuiu REAA ANDINN 6 227 UPC EAN Character Reconstr ctlOlr occi roa pom riae wr osa a aule tna stc SIEUR 6 228 EAN Two Label Minimum Read o rrr irr tpi Deae E RR RR RO Da ec ddd dre DOD 6 229 UPC EAN Correlation 2 22 iii De CRAD c ERU Redi lc rx NEP c NEP e KO E NP PLE RR FOD EAR 6 231 UPC EAN Minimum Segment Length 25 REG UO yaq DE sue Gn YRU yN IN CD MS RR 6 232 y a a Fe Le i Y HN EN HEFFER HF FEHEFIN NF EF aa aE k 6 238 Addon YNI Hu HEH REO 6 242 2 Digit Add ons Minimum Reads 2 rrr irte e ier htt Rip ERR RUE Ii RR UF O IR NEUR Di RUE 6 243 5b Digit Add ons Minimum Readsi a ee iy GE D ROD dotes Go GG a Reed IER DE Fi ET 6 245 Code 128 Add ons Minimum Reads 42 ipae sensu YRR OA RE RENG au ADUR aT 6 247 GTIN EHBable 2 2 prohi ip pa TER Yn OE Ad DRA DD s fRrX Ic Terr Ed GEI RA TEIG RR RGRAYRRTSOUU DRAN ERA 6 249 GTIN Label ID 2 3 5 9 559 DAFN NF FY FRY HF FE FN FE FT FFR HA HF FN TC 6 250 GTIN 2 Digit Supplemental abel ID 2 2 2 enero paid Ro DDR FD OD rnc aD RD REPE ean ERR 6 251 GTIN 5 Digit Supplemental Label TD prete ento UR RE ve teased eo see hee Me sleep o senex en ES
55. 6 252 GTIN Code 128 Supplemental Label ID 52 ie eni serene utut nit ne xen Sw lod ce tenait is 6 253 DataBar Omnidirectional Enable cai 5 prs iaa Ey Ree reb RAO ERU DRFrRpac2R Recr e xcu cans RR EE RG 6 254 DataBar Ominidirectional EAN 129 Emulation sisicscassscnnsniiexctecsceasnaaananedaacedouteccecaanadan 6 255 DataBar Omnidirectional Label ID eaw ew G i id RR RG RRR AD rre DE LLA dR OR D 6 256 DataBar Omnidirectional Minimum Reads secsi DL O i n I e n pen IG ERE USE 6 257 DDataBar Expanded Enable ce cask odere beue tee Gee nune a yi i iren dudes s necem Ha n 6 259 DataBar Expanded EAN 128 Etrulatloh eisie uico trao reto ee ck y iy iB a be beso A yR y 6 260 DataBar Expanded Label ID nti ER ERA FERERU SD dn tb DIRMI nadd RG CU GR t 6 261 DataBar Expanded Length Control iei ls eni dau ORG YR GR bius moet une Gad Gw UR sU 6 262 DataBar Expanded length l trucs p ERE DU ORG OUT NAG O Ga EE 6 263 DataBar Expanded Length 42 rsen OUR GU ciere rio ui YF aia Uw ng GATH o 6 264 DataBar Expanded MINIMUM Reads 25 ic ea senio eie o rao UD ORG RW yw syfi a Rig FE 6 265 Code 29PPTmable ice ER Gadd LADD a GAOL GOD i add doi idi ODd o ce ddd EU E 6 267 Code 39 Start Step Character TranSmlSSion cein eu ii i CiO OR Dn FU iade Fad EaD 6 268 Code 39 Check Character Calculation 2 5 5 iu au taria EE FD Ad GG DATO Esa E Y IER 6 269 Code 39 Check Character TranSMiSSiOM scorta ea Sk E yR Rc ace ny cus c a RAE ORRIAARIUA 6 270 Code 29 Fullt ASGLI cc Gi RA
56. 8300 8400 TYPE KEYBOA 6 70 Interface Related Features Keyboard Wedge G Interface Selection Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type since you can cause damage to the scanner and or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface ALWAYS make interface selections with the host CAUTION cable DISCONNECTED ACE TYPE KEYBOARD 6 71 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Wedge H Interface Selection Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type since you can cause damage to the scanner and or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface ALWAYS make interface selections with the host CAUTION cable DISCONNECTED E TYPE KEYBOAR 6 72 Magellan 8300 8400 Interface Related Features Keyboard Wedge I Interface Selection Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type since you can cause damage to the scanner and
57. 8300 series Magellan 8400 series Magellan 8500 series Magellan 9500 series and or Magellan SL series scanner and or scanner scale product including all embedded Software in and all Documentation related to such product which has been pur chased or otherwise acquired by End User whether obtained directly or indirectly from Datalogic 1 4 Software means any software or computer programs of Datalogic or its third party licensors in machine readable form which is embedded in the Dat alogic Product whether obtained directly or indirectly from Datalogic including any replacement update upgrade enhancement or modification 2 Scope Of License Granted 2 1 Datalogic grants to End User a non exclusive non transferable perpetual license to use the Software solely on the Datalogic Product in which it is embedded designated Datalogic Product in machine readable form only solely for End User s internal business purposes This Agreement does not convey ownership of the Software to End User Title to the Software shall be and remain with Datalogic or the third party from whom Datalogic has obtained a licensed right As used in this Agreement the term purchase or its equivalents when applied to the Software shall mean acquire under license End User is not entitled to receipt or use of the source code to any Software 2 2 End User shall not copy modify decompile disassemble reverse engineer or otherwise reproduce or remanufacture the
58. A060992011187 UPC A with 2 Digit Supplemental System number must be included in label data Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor rect Supplemental data is appended to base label Prefix must be an ASCII character A total length including prefix must be 15 Example A06099201118712 Magellan 8300 8400 UPC A with 5 Digit Supplemental System number must be included in label data Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor rect Prefix must be an ASCII character A total length including prefix must be 18 Example A06099201118712345 UPC A with Code 128 Supplemental System number must be included in label data Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor rect Supplemental data is appended to base label Prefix must be an ASCII character A total length including prefix must be greater or equal to 19 Code 128 Supplemental codes are variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters Characters immediately following base label must be of the form 8100 8101 or 8102 Example A0609920111878100000951 UPC E System number must be included in label data Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor rect Prefix must be an ASCII character E total length including prefix must be 9 Example E09988750 Product Reference Guide UPC E with 2 Digit Supplement
59. DO RDnURPIR NNREERIANQUADISLUSN EUN RE OOF RAE TE 6 291 Code 128 Correlation iiu ui eei s ni Rn eer Run Dl GRAA dd pas d IU DRO LLO EEO 6 292 Code 128 StltChimg ce ed in ERI IU UIS GLEFYD GW E DY M DAR 6 293 Code 128 Minn REGUS ai din RR GR singe ae Rd RI Tf Sd ydy Sd dnd aer ido 6 294 EAN 129 Enable iini ecov et un tuia vx voe GYRRU FADDAU EGG YN RS DUE CR yh 6 296 EANET289 Label TI sies iiedS deeb nt E MERI Bain gu PRICE Rd GAD DESG DLOS TN ORA DDN E 88 6 297 Interleaved 2 of 5 L 2 00 5 Enable ueu sese wd SO Real CUR ARY AU mesi nL 6 298 1 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation 1 2 2i tet emiten e roc RR EPEA 6 299 T 2 of 5 Check Character TransrmissiOT aicr egisse si GRY RR DA UY GR RR RAA A DOR RR 6 300 1 2 ofS Label ID iaa in a FY O sd RO aw SG YO Gn GU Ca GR DE Ea Gw 6 301 L20f5 Length Control iie ADAR Ge Adain ORUG GUDD sha aieaGdaadance ddad EU DDd Fn ties 6 302 D2 Of o Lemgth i caei GG nea CR Cd UD FR ia 6 303 D 2 0f 5 Length 2 ge FRIG eT UC RUN GaG Iii RU YDI RG GE OU GO DURUM RUNE 6 304 I2 0f5 CohrelablOFi iiic psccns anaana ni TEn ANAE D ANEDE 6 305 12 of oee niao Ln S MES PHWY HEN Y YNE FN HR HF FFEFRIR FF FFF O USE SU FFF UF 6 306 E 2 0f 5 Milninauim Read amp aaa iL a GR da Id leid nia GO Gn Tada ddd GTA 6 307 Standard 2 of 5 Std 2 01 5 Enable a Gei Gn GO cubo O O GO r Gn dU Ge EFO O 6 309 Standard 2 0f 5 Check Character Calculation su peres GWYR HEAR Fence GOF MA Db 6 310 Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission 154
60. Datalogic reserves the right to change any specification at any time without prior notice Datalogic and the Datalogic logo are registered trademarks of Datalogic S p A in many countries including the U S A and the E U All other brand and product names may be trademarks of their respective owners Magellan is a registered trademark of Datalogic Scanning Inc in many countries including the U S A and the E U This product may be covered by one or more of the following patents 4603262 4639606 4652750 4672215 4699447 4709369 4749879 4786798 4792666 4794240 4798943 4799164 4820911 4845349 4861972 4861973 4866257 4868836 4879456 4939355 4939356 4943127 4963719 4971176 4971177 4991692 5001406 5015831 5019697 5019698 5086879 5115120 5144118 5146463 5179270 5198649 5200597 5202784 5208449 5210397 5212371 5212372 5214270 5229590 5231293 5232185 5233169 5235168 5237161 5237162 5239165 5247161 5256864 5258604 5258699 5260554 5274219 5296689 5298728 5311000 5327451 5329103 5330370 5347113 5347121 5371361 5382783 5386105 5389917 5410108 5420410 5422472 5426507 5438187 5440110 5440111 5446271 5446749 5448050 5463211 5475206 5475207 5479011 5481098 5491328 5493108 5504350 5508505 5512740 5541397 5552593 5557095 5563402 5565668 5576531 5581707 5594231 5594441
61. Drainage Figure 2 13 Medium Flanged Models 8302 8304 8402 8404 Scanner Reference Dimensions Models 8302 8304 8402 8404 Medium Flanged Scanner Reference Dimensions 11 5 29 21cm 0 1cm 4 59 11 7cm 1 0 5 19 2 54cm 75 13 2cm 1 905cm X 408 10 36cm 0 375 0 15cm E ET 0 95cm 15 71 1 125 39 9cm x 0 15cm 2 86cm Product Reference Guide 2 17 Figure 2 14 Long Shelf Models 8303 8305 8403 8405 Cutout Dimensions Models 8303 8305 8403 8405 Long Shelf Cutout Optional Leveling Feet Max Radius 0 25 0 635cm 4x Leveling Feet 6 89 Models 8303 8305 8403 8405 Long Shelf 17 5cm Supports 4 08 1036cm Shelf Support Rails Liquid Drainage Support Rails Figure 2 15 Long Shelf Models 8303 8305 8403 8405 Scanner Reference Dimensions Models 8303 8305 8403 8405 Long Shelf Scanner Reference Dimensions 11 5 29 21cm 0 1cm 459 11 7cm 5 19 13 2cm 9 5 9 27 i 03 6cm 24 13cm x 0 2cm i Y 4 08 10 36cm x 0 15cm 1 17 75 45 1cm 0 15cm 2 18 Magellan 8300 8400 Counter Cutout Figure 2 16 Long Flanged Models 8303 8305 8403 8405 Cutout Dimensions Cutout Max Radius 0 25 0 635cm 4x a 905cm Center Line _ M
62. Enables disables the ability of the scanner to translate to Code 39 full ASCII labels To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH CODE 3 9 FULL ASCII bar code Product Reference Guide 6 271 ULL ASCIl Code 39 Label ID This feature specifies a Code 39 label ID to be added to bar code data 7 The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET CODE 39 LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1
63. OR ANY OTHER BASIS EXCEED THE PRICE OR FEE PAID BY END USER FOR THE DATALOGIC PRODUCT UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL DATALOGIC BE LIABLE TO END USER OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR LOST PROFITS LOST DATA INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS OR SERVICE OR FOR ANY OTHER SPECIAL CONSEGUENTIAL CONTINGENT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL PUNITIVE EXEMPLARY OR OTHER SIMILAR DAMAGES EVEN IF DATALOGIC HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES 9 Government Restricted Rights International Use 9 1 Use duplication or disclosure of the Software by the U S Government is subject to the restrictions for computer software developed at private expense as set forth in the U S Federal Acquisition Regulations at FAR 52 227 14 g or 52 227 19 or in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 c 1 ii whichever is applicable 9 2 If End User is using the Datalogic Product outside of the United States End User must comply with the applicable local laws of the country in which the Datalogic Product is used with U S export control laws and with the English language version of this Agreement The provisions of the United Nations Convention on International Sale of Goods shall not apply to this Agreement 10 Termination 10 1 Either party may terminate this Agreement or any license granted under this Agreement at any time upon written notice if the other party breaches any provision of this Agreement 10 2 Upon termination of this Ag
64. POS terminals require two interface cables one for the scanner interface and one for the scale interface Refer to Figure 2 25 for cable connection locations Product Reference Guide 2 33 Control Panel Service Loo Scanner Right Profile P If you have a scanner with no scale there will be only one interface cable to the POS terminal Connect the power cord to the scanner and route the other end down through the checkstand to the AC power outlet DO NOT plug the power cord in at this time Figure 2 25 Connecting Cables to the Scanner Scale Scanner Left Profile m EAS Port Aux Port POS Terminal Remote Display Scale Host EAS PORT AUXILIARY PORT POWER POSTERMINAL REMOTE DISPLAY SCALE HOST Connection to Controls EAS external EAS device deactivation system Test Port On Screen Programming OSP Application Download RS 232 Handheld Scanner Input Auxiliary RS 232 Label Data Output AC Brick Input Label Data OR Scale Data for Power off Terminal single cable interfaces POT Brick Input Application Download where appropriate Drives Remote Display Scale Data dual cable scanner scale Connection to this port is Optional Models with scale only Dual cable units
65. Prefix must be an ASCII characters FF total length including pre fix must be 12 Example FF0021012612 EAN 8 with 5 Digit Supplemental Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor rect Prefix must be an ASCII characters FF total length including pre fix must be 15 Example FF0021012612345 EAN 8 with Code 128 Supplemental Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor rect Supplemental data is appended to base label Prefix must be an ASCII characters FF total length including pre fix must be greater than 16 code 128 Supplemental codes are vari able length having a minimum of 2 data characters Characters immediately following base label must be of the form 8100 8101 or 8102 Example FF002101268102000951 Product Reference Guide EAN 13 Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor rect Prefix must be an ASCII character F total length including prefix must be 14 Example F1101234567891 EAN 13 with 2 Digit Supplemental Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor rect Supplemental data is appended to base label Prefix must be an ASCII character F total length including prefix must be 16 Example F110123456789112 EAN 13 with 5 Digit Supplemental Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor rect Prefix must be an ASCII character F
66. S Bureau of Labor Statistics reports that the incidence of repetitive motion injuries has increased dramatically in recent years Checkstand design and scanner installation and operation procedures can reduce the risk of repetitive motion injuries but not eliminate it Although there are currently no formal guidelines for checkstand ergo nomics the Food Marketing Institute FMI and the National Institute of Occupational Safety NIOSH of the Department of Health and Human Services have released the reports listed at the end of these recommenda tions These reports contain useful suggestions for ergonomic improve ment of checkstand designs and scanner installation maintenance and usage Portions of the reports are summarized below For copies of the complete reports or to inquire about any modifications to the recommen dations contact FMI and NIOSH at the addresses listed at the end of these recommendations Product Reference Guide 2 3 Checkstand Design 1 10 11 12 Select a design which allows load sharing by several muscle groups for example designs which allow the cashier to use both hands for scanning and bagging Select checkstands which deliver products to the cashier on an input belt and do not require the unloading of items from a cart These designs put less stress on the cashiers shoulders and back Minimize the distance between the input and take away conveyors i e the distance the cashier ha
67. Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code N Conversion D 6 186 Magellan 8300 8400 N Conversion EAN 13 Enable EAN 13 Label ID This feature specifies an EAN 13 label ID to be added to bar code data To set this feature The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET EAN 13 LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex va
68. Topics include how tos on scanning EAS label deactivation weighing re zeroing the scale removing the top cover and cleaning the upper and lower windows Scanning Items To scan items using the scanner slide or push them through the scan zone as shown in Figure 3 1 The scanner will work equally well with either a left to right or right to left motion through the scan zone There is rarely a need to reorient an item s bar code since the scanner has a 360 degree view around an item Limited Scanning Mode is entered by default by interfaces such as USB Y and IBM until a Point Of Sale POS terminal enables scanning This mode allows the scanner to read labels without a host interface enabled The scan ner will only process programming labels and emit a bad label read indica NOTE tion chirp for all other labels Product Reference Guide 3 1 Figure 3 1 Scan Zone Note that indicate what the scanner sees Vertical Window Scan Zone Horizontal Window Scan Zone Checker Side d i Zone y Proper Scanning Technique The scanner was designed to provide the ultimate in ergonomic enhance ments for Point Of Sale POS scanning To take advantage of these advancements Practice the techniques below to improve scanning efficiency e Move the product across the horizontal window See Figure 3 1 e Since the scanner can reads labels 360 degrees around the product do
69. Waor Sie weage IBM OEM USB Cable UPC EAN Guard Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Insertion UPC EAN Stitch Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Exact Label Halves UPC EAN Stitch Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Unlike Label Halves UPC EAN Character gae queas sible Disable Desde Demie Reconstruction EAN Two Label Mini 1 1 1 1 1 1 mum Reads Addon Timer 70mS 70mS 70mS 70mS 70mS 70mS UPC EAN Correlation Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable 2 Digit Add ons Mini mum Reads 2 2 2 2 2 2 5 Digit Add ons Mini 1 i i i mum Reads Code 128 Add ons 1 l Minimum Reads UPC EAN Minimum Segment Length p 5 5 5 5 5 GTIN Enable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable GTIN Label ID G G G G GTIN 2 Digit Supple mental Label ID G2 G2 G2 G2 GTIN 5 Digit Supple mental Label ID G5 G5 G5 G5 GTIN Code 128 Sup G8 Bf Bs m plemental Label ID F 10 Magellan 8300 8400 RS 232 Wincor Nixdorf RS 232 Single Cable Keybd Wedge IBM OEM USB DataBar Omnidirec tional Enable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable DataBar Omnidirec tional EAN 128 Emu lation Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable DataBar Omnidirec tional Label ID R4 R4 R4 DataBar Omnidirec tional Minimum Reads
70. be 11 Example E400210126 2 Digit Supplemental Supplemental data is appended to any EAN base label Prefix must be ASCII characters E1 length of Supplemental data including prefix must be 5 Total required length is 21 for EAN 13 and 16 for EAN 8 Prefix for the main body portion of the label for UPCA UPCE EANI3 can be JEO or E3 If the main body prefix for UPCA UPCF EAN13 is JEO then the 2 digit addon portion of the label must have a prefix of E1 Examples addon portion is highlighted data is underlined UPC A 2 Digit addon E00060992011187 E112 UPC E 2 Digit addon JE00000000998875 E112 EAN 8 2 Digit addon JE400210126 E112 EAN 13 2 Digit addon E01101234567891 E112 UPC A E3006099201 118712 UPC E E3000000099887512 EAN 13 E3110123456789112 Product Reference Guide G 11 5 Digit Supplemental e Supplemental data is appended to any EAN base label Prefix must be ASCII characters E2 e Length of supplemental data including prefix must be 8 Total required length is 24 for EAN 13 and 19 for EAN 8 Prefix for the main body portion of the label for UPCA UPCE EANI3 can be JEO or E3 e If the main body prefix for UPCA UPCE EAN 13 is EO then the 5 digit addon portion of the label must have a prefix of JE2 Examples addon portion is highlighted data is underlined UPC A 5 Digit addon E0006099201 1187 E212345 UPC E 5 Digit addon JE000000009
71. check calculation is disabled the risk is increased that a misread can occur In particular if you are using variable length stitching it is important to use NOTE check character calculation to prevent misreads To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION 39 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6 269 Code 39 Check Character Transmission Enables disables transmission of optional Code 39 check character To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION HECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSIO 6 270 Magellan 8300 8400 Code 39 Enable Code 39 Full ASCII
72. codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code 6 238 Magellan 8300 8400 Other UPC EAN Options Addons continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 2 DIGIT ADD ONS 2 DIGIT ADD Product Reference Guide 6 239 Addons continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan AL 5 DIGIT ADD ONS ENABLE L 5 DIGIT ADD ONS 6 240 Magellan 8300 8400 Other UPC EAN Options Addons continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan AL CODE 128 ADD ONS Product Reference Guide 6 241 NAL CODE 128 ADD ONS Addon Timer When addons have been selected as optional this feature sets the duration of time that the scanner can unsuccessfully look for an addon before pro ceeding to read a bar code Timer duration is specified in 10ms incre ments To set the Addon Timer 1 Scan t
73. codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan D LAYOUT 6 146 Magellan 8300 8400 D LAYOUT Keyboard Wedge USB Keyboard Features Keyboard Interface Keyboard Layout continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan ARD LAYOUT Product Reference Guide 6 147 D LAYOUT Keyboard Interface Keyboard Layout continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan D LAYOUT D LAYOUT 6 148 Magellan 8300 8400 Keyboard Wedge USB Keyboard Features Keyboard Interface Keyboard Layout continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan SWEDEN Product Reference Guide 6 149 LAYOUT Keyboard Interface Keyboard Layout continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan LAYOUT JAPANE 6 150 Magellan 8300 8400 D LAYOUT Keyboard Wedge U
74. codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 6 7 C 4 MagellanTM 8300 8400 Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits characters from a keypad Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 8 9 Product Reference Guide C 5 Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits characters from a keypad Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan A B C 6 Magellan 8300 8400 Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits characters from a keypad Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan C D Product Reference Guide C 7 Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits characters from a keypad Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure th
75. control for this symbology type Function characters may be transmitted as a hexadecimal value 8x Where x correlates to function characters 1 thru 4 as follows x80 function code 1 x81 function code 2 x82 function code 3 x83 function code 4 For Code 128 programming labels the format is of the general form f 82nnnnn r 82 is hexadecimal 82 and r is carriage return Example Code_128 Test MSI Plessey Check character must be included in label data Label length including check character and excluding prefix charac ter must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner s fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type Prefix must be an ASCII character amp Example 144769254 Code 93 Prefix must be an ASCII character amp Label length excluding prefix character must meet reguirements imposed by the main scanner s fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type Example amp Code93 test Product Reference Guide AIM Formats AIM specifies a 3 character string that is attached as a prefix to the label data for transmission Because AIM specifies one identifier for UPC A UPC E and EAN 13 labels UPC A UPC E and EAN 13 will be received from the handheld and transmitted to the POS by the scanner as EAN 13 Using this form of identification the character must be the first charac ter in the label received from the handheld Further identificat
76. crscssisacnwomtansnanumionctiage seastametitiamontadanaaneh aa Nn NENE 6 177 UPC E 2 Digit Supplemental Label ID scscaussissncnaciancianmaagnemesaaecaugeaniancaeastacncnaamenanedage 6 178 UPCCE 5 DIgit Supplemental Label ID aen ice iie ynad GO EUW a a ENA Cf 6 179 UPC E 128 Supplemental Label DD es 2 nie Oi ONE Cud OE Gi bo GY Ail RD 6 180 UPC E Minimum Reads 2 22 55 9 trice nitens Gw SITE FY Al o r nlr od Gyl E ge sita 6 181 EAN 13 Enadbl amp iei Ges THOU GG cies i Fi YW EG YD CU Y GR Y CR wna RG ei Y Fa 6 183 EAN t3 First Character TransmissiOll ia neei Ou nd Du iU dw ddd dad GB GY CE 6 184 EAN 13 Check Character TramsnmnissiOn si succedit eadem ck RA Dw a OUR da 6 185 EAN T3 ISBN Conversion Enable sicisccentacceianecisesadeiimaninsnnn a aa 6 186 EAN 13 babel DD sieges saccades DIN Sew na Y ETans a NC o n CF TEU Fn Gn aln ald ni AARDED 6 187 EAN 13 2 Digit Supplemental Label ID 5 522 rtr omo DA y i NR DF indie y mene s 6 188 EAN 13 5 Digit Supplemental Label ID 22 iadu Gr rrr tn NODER DAR CR RYD Ren RO FR 6 189 EAN t93 128 Supplemental Label ID siririna GAA Fon stade Ska bois Ond 6 190 EAN 13 Minimum Reads iion eni EIC PEDE t e dit umque ue E A 6 191 Booklana Label ID x op tipeci s sa oq eee setitani conch ca qu esae ura un FRAU EN a ER i 6 193 iN Ercole 6 194 EAN 8 Check Character TransrmisslOn 2a eaanciikce heh cei ehe RODDIR arca D Di RR YRR Wn RR Ra 6 195 Expand EANSS to E
77. digit numbers with lead ing zeroes to yield a three digit entry 000 075 Examples 000 Infinite timeout 001 200ms 005 1 000ms 1 second 040 8 000ms 8 seconds 075 15 000ms 15 seconds 4 The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned SET RS 232 ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE 6 124 Magellan 8300 8400 RS 232 Features RS 232 ACK NAK Retry Count This feature sets the number of times for the scanner to retry a label trans mission under a retry condition To set the RS 232 ACK NAK Retry Count 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET RS 232 ACK NAK RETRY COUNT below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired number The selectable range is 0 255 resets Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 000 255 A setting of 255 specifies retry forever NOTE 4 The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned SET RS 232 ACK NAK RETRY COUNT Product Reference Guide 6 125 RS 232 ACK NAK Error Handling This ite
78. emitted from the scan windows has been shown not to be harmful The safety record of bar code scanning is perfect after mil lions of hours of use worldwide This safe and efficient use of laser tech nology has gained wide acceptance in industries throughout the world Operators and installers of the unit should observe the following cautions and warnings Use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous laser light exposure The use of optical instruments with the scanner will increase eye hazard Optical instruments include binoculars microscopes telescopes and mag nifying glasses This does not include eyeglasses worn by the user To prevent exposure to laser light do not remove the protective housing of the scanner There are no user serviceable parts inside your scanner or scanner scale 1 12 Magellan 8300 8400 Laser and Product Safety Safety precautions to be taken No adjustments or alteration of the scanner or scanner scale housing are to be attempted by the user The failure of the facet wheel motor while the unit is continuing to emit a CAUTION laser beam causes the emission levels to exceed those for inherently safe operation The unit has safeguards to prevent this occurrence If however a stationary laser beam is ever emitted the failing unit should be disconnected from its power supply until repaired by a qualified technician Th
79. if currently connected 2 Scan the SWITCH bar code 3 Scan the bar code representing the appropriate interface located on the following pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes adja cent to and on any facing pages to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Product Reference Guide 6 55 Interface Type continued 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code Once the correct interface has been set it will be necessary to proceed to the appropriate pages in this manual that select parameters and options for that interface For example if RS 232 is selected turn to the pages in this manual headed as features specific to the RS 232 interface NOTE 5 Connect new interface cable s 6 56 Magellan 8300 8400 Interface Related Features RS 232 Interface Selection Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type since you can cause damage to the scanner and or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface ALWAYS make interface selections with the CAUTION host cable DISCONNECTED INTERFACE TYPE RS 232 STANDARD 6 57 Product Reference Guide RS 232 Wincor Nixdorf Interface Selection Remember to cover any u
80. input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 T and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET PHARMACODE 39 LABEL ID 6 284 Magellan 8300 8400 Code 128 Enable Code 128 Enable Enables disables the ability of the scanner to decode Code 128 labels To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code CODE 128 DISABLE CODE 128 ENABLE 1 Exception The Code 128 symbology is always enabled with regard to scanning reading the spe cial C128 programming bar codes provided in this manual Product Reference Guide 6 285 Code 128 Transmit Function Characters Enables disables transmission of Code 128 function characters 1 2 3 and 4 2 Disabled is the recommended setting for all interfaces NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on thi
81. is 1 100 which is the interval duration in 10 millisecond increments Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 001 100 Examples 001 10ms 005 50ms 040 400ms 100 1 000ms 1 second 4 The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned ET KEYBOARD INTERFACE QUIET INTERVAL Product Reference Guide 6 153 Keyboard Interface Caps Lock State Specifies the format in which the scanner sends character data Choices are e CAPS LOCK OFF send character data in normal format e CAPS LOCK ON send character data in reverse case e SHIFT LOCK ON send character data in shifted case This option only applies to Wedge G For other interface this setting results in a CAPS LOCK OFF functionality e CAPS LOCK COMPENSATION MODE This only applies to the USB Keyboard Interface For other interfaces this setting results in a CAPS LOCK OFF functionality To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code CAPS LOCK STATE OFF K STATE CAPS 6 154 Magellan 8300 840
82. kg 2 Place an additional 2 50 kilograms in the center of the weighing sur face and check that the display reads between 12 490 kg and 12 510 kg 3 Place an additional 2 50 kilograms in the center of the weighing sur face and check that the display reads between 14 990 kg and 15 010 kg 4 Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0 000 kg Product Reference Guide 5 13 5 You have completed phase two of the increasing load test Blanking Test This test ensures that the scanner scale will indicate its weighing capability has been exceeded if a weight greater than 0 82 over its maximum upper weight limit is placed upon the unit 1 Place weights that total the upper limit plus 0 82 kilograms on the weigh platter For example If the upper limit is set at 15 kilograms place weights equaling 15 82 kilograms 2 Verify that the display shows a dash and three hyphens _ This is the overweight indication 7 The scanner scale may blank show an underscore and three hyphens at any A weight greater than its upper limit but must blank when the upper limit plus 0 82 pounds are set upon the weighing surface NOTE 5 14 Magellan 8300 8400 Calibration Verification Kilograms Decreasing Load Test This test ensures that the scanner scale responds properly when a heavy object is followed by a significantly smaller object 1 Place weights that total 15 8 kilograms If the upper weig
83. length including check characters and excluding prefix charac ter must meet reguirements imposed by the main scanner s fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type Prefix must be an ASCII character i Example i0123456789 Product Reference Guide Standard 2 of 5 Check character must be included in label data Label length including check characters and excluding prefix charac ters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner s fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type Prefix must be an ASCII character s Example s0123456789 Codabar Check character must be included in label data Label length including check character and excluding prefix charac ter must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner s fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type Prefix must be an ASCII character 90 Start stop character sets must meet the matching requirement set forth by the scanner configuration item Codabar Start Stop Character Match Start stop character sets must be of the form ABCD ABCD and must be included in the label Example s 99 95s the lower case s at each end of the example is a placeholder for the start stop character set Magellan 8300 8400 Code 128 Prefix must be an ASCII character Label length excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner s fixed or variable label length
84. ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code LASER TIMEOUT 5 MINUTES 6 16 Magellan 8300 8400 General Scanner Features Laser Timeout continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan LASER TIMEOUT 10 MINUTES LASER TIMEOUT 15 MINUTES Product Reference Guide 6 17 Motor Timeout The Motor Timeout feature sets the time for automatically switching the motor off when the scanner is not in use motor timeout shorter than the laser timeout the motor and the laser will y Laser safety requires that the laser switch off before the motor If you set the both shut off when the motor timeout expires NOTE To set the Motor Timeout 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code MOTOR TIMEOUT 5 MINUTES
85. manual has been developed to make it quick and easy for users of all levels to find the information needed to understand and configure fea tures The following descriptions will help you to determine where to go from here Understanding the Basics If you have little or no prior experience with programming using bar code labels you should review the first few pages of this chapter to familiarize yourself with the basics of scanner programming before performing any changes to your configuration Product Reference Guide 6 1 Integrating the Scanner With Your Host System Your scanner MUST be equipped with the correct hardware interface board cable etc to properly communicate with your host system Con tact your dealer for information if you have questions about your scanner s hardware compatibility You may also want to contact the dealer or your system administrator if you have no record of how your scanner was pre programmed at the fac tory Scanners are typically programmed with the default settings for spe cific interface types see Appendix F Factory Defaults for more information however your scanner may have been custom configured with settings that are unique to your company or application Once you know the scanner s current settings you can determine what changes will be required to allow communication with your host system and or optional features you choose to modify to customize your installa tion After
86. no longer than 50 milliseconds Symbologies requiring fixed lengths UPC EAN will enforce length requirements for validation of the label Handheld scanner will be required to transmit start and stop charac ters for Codabar and Code 39 labels Appropriate industrial length requirements will be enforced if con figured for validation of the label Maximum label lengths will be enforced for label validation i e labels longer than the maximum label size will not be validated Standard Datalogic formats generally use a single prefix character The specific formats are provided below Product Reference Guide G 1 Datalogic Handheld Data Format Requirements The following sections describe label transmission formats that are typi cally observed in factory configurations of Datalogic handheld scanners DataBar Omnidirectional Prefix must be ASCII characters R4 Check character must be included in label Application identifier 01 must follow the prefix and preceed the base label Label length excluding prefix characters must be 16 characters Example R40101044123456789 DataBar Expanded Prefix must be ASCII characters R4 Check character must be included in label UPC A System number must be included in label data Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor rect Prefix must be an ASCII character A total length including prefix must be 13 Example
87. or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface ALWAYS make interface selections with the host CAUTION cable DISCONNECTED E TYPE KEYBOAR 6 73 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Wedge J Interface Selection Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type since you can cause damage to the scanner and or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface ALWAYS make interface selections with the host CAUTION cable DISCONNECTED E TYPE KEYBOAR 6 74 Magellan 8300 8400 Interface Related Features Maximum Host Transmitted Message Length Specifies the maximum number of data characters allowed in messages transmitted to the host To set the Maximum Host Transmitted Message Length 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET MAXIMUM HOST TRANSMITTED MES SAGE LENGTH below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired maximum host transmitted message length The selectable range is 0 249 data characters Labels that are longer than this length are not read Pad all singl
88. power power without excessive electrical noise Counter Preparation Since the majority of grocery checkout lanes are designed as left hand take away the counter drawings in this chapter focus on this counter design Simply reverse the layout for a right hand take away requirement The unit scans equally well in either of these two configurations Liquid Drainage Should a liquid spill occur ensure that moisture can flow through the checkstand without pooling Leveling Plan ahead and provide screws bolts in the checkstand mounts and a leveling guide board to allow leveling of the scanner or scanner scale within the counter Use a 0 375 thick board to replicate the mounting flange on the long scanner or scanner scale and adjust screws or bolts until the board is flush within the counter Use a 4 0 wide board stood on its end to adjust leveling screws bolts in rail support applications Cable Routing Placement of the scanner scale should be planned to allow easy access to other components as well as optimize communication between the scanner the POS terminal the optional Remote Scale Dis play and any EAS peripheral equipment Do not route interface cables near any electrical motors or other sources of electromagnetic interference Remote Scale Display Placement The customer and checker in some instances must be able to easily view and read the Remote Scale Dis play Ambient light and mounting heig
89. recording the modifications needed finish reading this chapter then turn to the appropriate page and follow the instructions to program the scanner When all scanner features are programmed to your satisfaction the scan ner is ready to be placed into operation Customizing Your Scanner s Operation Most scanner programming falls within three general categories General Scanner Features are features common to all interface types Examples include beeper adjustments such as volume and length read verification settings etc EAS Features control the settings for interfacing with the optional EAS device 6 2 MagellanTM 8300 8400 Integrating the Scanner With Your Host Sys e Interface Related Features are the mandatory settings necessary to allow communication with your host terminal Examples of these settings are RS 232 baud rate and parity It is possible via programming bar codes to change the interface type for example from RS 232 to IBM Port 17 Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type since you can cause damage to the scanner and or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface ALWAYS CAUTION make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED Ensure that your planned modifications are compatible with the current inter face For example baud rate selections are only valid in the RS 232 interface The scanner will sound an error tone when scan
90. set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code N CHARACTER RECONSTRUCTION EAN CHARACTER RECONSTRUC 6 228 Magellan 8300 8400 Other UPC EAN Options EAN Two Label Minimum Reads Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an EAN Two Label bar code must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar O LABEL MINIMUM R code O LABEL MINIMUM REA Product Reference Guide 6 229 EAN Two Label Minimum Reads continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan EAN TWO LA ADS 3 BEL MINIMUM RE
91. take into account the routing of Remote Dis play cabling Ensure that distance and obstacles spanned by the routed cable will not kink pinch or stretch it Also keep in mind you may need to drill a hole through which to route it during shipping to prevent damage to the locking tabs see Figure 2 23 E 2 The Remote Scale Display connector end may be secured with a rubber band After routing the cable remove this rubber band before connecting Failure to NOTE remove the band will keep the connector from latching properly Placing and Installing the Remote Scale Display Reference Figure 2 23 while performing these procedures 1 Determine where you want to install the Remote Scale Display based on your counter design the viewing angle lighting consider ations and cable routing discussed previously Reference Figure 2 21 for the display s physical dimensions Optimally the display s should be approximately eye level to the viewer s Use the template provided in Figure 2 24 to mark locations of the mounting screw and cable routing holes The mounting screw holes are on 3 1 2 85 1 mm centers The cable can either be routed through a 3 4 19 mm diameter hole directly under the mounting base or through the cutout in the back of the base see Figure 2 23 Drill the mounting screw holes using a drill bit of the appropriate diameter for your mounting screws or bolts Drill the cable routing hole using a 3 4 19
92. the Datalogic Product with an equivalent product not subject to such claim or 4 provide End User an opportunity to return the Datalogic Product and receive a refund of the purchase price paid less a reasonable allow ance for use 7 3 Datalogic shall have no liability to End User for claims of infringement based upon 1 the use of any Datalogic Product in combination with any product which Datalogic has not either furnished or authorized for use with such Datalogic Product 2 the use of any Datalogic Product designed manufac tured or modified to the specifications of End User or 3 End User s modification of the Datalogic Product without written authorization from Datalogic 7 4 THE FOREGOING STATES DATALOGIC S COMPLETE AND ENTIRE OBLIGATION CONCERNING CLAIMS OF PATENT COPYRIGHT OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY INFRINGEMENT CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES ANY PRIOR AGREEMENTS WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN BETWEEN THE PARTIES CONCERNING SUCH CLAIMS AND WILL NOT BE MODIFIED OR AMENDED BY ANY PAST CONTEMPORANEOUS OR FUTURE AGREEMENTS OR DEALINGS BETWEEN THE PARTIES WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN A FUTURE WRITING SIGNED BY BOTH PARTIES 8 Limitation Of Liability EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN SECTION 7 DATALOGIC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIMS AGAINST END USER BY ANY OTHER PARTY IN NO EVENT SHALL DATALOGIC S LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES IF ANY WHETHER BASED UPON CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE PROD UCT LIABILITY STRICT LIABILITY WARRANTY
93. the SWITCH bar IN STO 1 RE MINIMUM READS code TORE MINIMUM READS 1 Instore labels are defined as UPC A labels with a number system character of 2 or 4 as well as EAN 8 and EAN 13 labels with a Flag1 character of 2 or an EAN 13 label starting with the three characters 980 Product Reference Guide 6 221 In Store Label Minimum Reads continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan ORE MINIMUM R 6 222 Magellan 8300 8400 Other UPC EAN Options Enable EAN Two Label Enables disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN two label pairs To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code i Contact Customer Support for details about advanced programming for this fea ture N TWO LABEL DISABLE N TWO LABEL ENABLE 6 223 Product Reference Guide EAN Two Label Combined Transmission Enables disables the transmitting of an EAN two label
94. the bar code you intend to scan ORCED ZER E bin FOR2 RUIT 6 46 Magellan 8300 8400 Scale Features Scale Interface Type Use this feature to select the scale interface type Choices are e No Scale Interface e RS 232 SASI RS232 ICL To set the Scale Interface Type 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SCALE INTERFACE TYPE NO SCALE INTERFACE SCALE INTERFACE TYPE RS 232 SASI Product Reference Guide 6 47 Scale Interface Type continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan SCALE INTERFACE TYPE RS 232 ICL 6 48 Magellan 8300 8400 Scale Features Scale Calibration Notification When enabled this feature allows the host to be notified of a calibration event To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the two bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this a
95. to ensure that you are meeting all legal and regula tory requirements Chapter 5 Calibration describes the calibration sequence and verification process Calibration can only be performed if the tamper seal that secures access to the Calibration Switch is broken and the switch cover is removed Break ing the seal may ega y render the scale inoperable until it has been recerti fied and a new seal attached Consult your local regulations before removing the calibration seal if you are unsure of the legal requirements Although the scale will physically continue to weigh products a broken seal may require recertification by a proper authority as designated by your local laws 1 Zero light operation is configurable 3 10 Magellan 8300 8400 Operational Maintenance Operational Maintenance The scanner or scanner scale will provide dependable service for many years The following maintenance procedures will keep your scanner or scanner scale operating at peak performance Cleaning the Platter and Scan Windows Clean the exterior surfaces of the horizontal and vertical scan windows at least twice daily with a nonabra sive mild water based glass cleaner and paper towels or lint free cleaning tissues The textured plastic surfaces and stainless steel can also be cleaned using the same cleaning agents Cleaning the Air Gap Debris Chutes amp Drip Rail Daily clear the debris chutes between the platter and the outer hou
96. topic Warm Up Time in Chapter 1 Introduction When the unit is moved from a cooler temperature such as a storage area to a warmer environment such as a checkstand location a period of 60 minutes must be allowed to acclimate the unit to ambient conditions Once installed and powered up a power up warm up period of 15 minutes must be allowed before calibrating or performing weighing operations These two warm up periods may run concurrently 5 Verify that the scanner or scanner scale passes an operational test by observing the following Product Reference Guide 2 23 Scanner Pass UPC EAN bar code labels in front of the scanner s win dows Since the interface cable is not yet connected to the POS ter minal the scanner may be limited to reading only one or two labels see the note that follows The scanner indicates when each label has been successfully read by flashing the green scanner light and emitting a good read tone beep Some host interface types may chirp instead of beeping one or two labels This limitation is dependent upon the interface type To scan multiple labels without connecting to the host place the unit in Scanner NOTE Diagnostic Mode by pressing the Volume Tone Push Button for four seconds When not connected to the host the scanner may be limited to reading only EAS System The way in which EAS labels are deactivated is depen dent upon which aftermarket EAS system was purcha
97. unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan BEEP VOLUME 6 40 Magellan 8300 8400 Indication Features Good Read When to Indicate This feature specifies when the scanner will provide indication beep and or flash its green LED upon successfully reading a bar code e Good Read Indicate after decode e Good Read Indicate after transmit e Good Read Indicate after CTS goes inactive then active 232 WN interfaces only If set to this mode in other interfaces Indicate after y The Indicate after CTS goes inactive mode applies to RS 232 STD and RS decode mode will be implemented NOTE To set the Good Read When to Indicate feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the desired mode bar code from this page You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code Product Reference Guide 6 41 INDICATE AFTER D Good Read When to Indicate continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan OD READ INDICATE AFTER TRANSMIT OD READ INDICATE AF
98. when raised the Produce Bar also provide a convenient way to ensure items do not rest on the counter or other non weighing surfaces Reference Figure 3 2 i It is important that items rest entirely on the platter for their full weight to be accurately recorded NOTE Figure 3 2 All Weighs Platter amp Item Placement Produce All Weighs Bar Option Platter Produce Rail Option 2 Once weighed items are in place enter PLU price Look Up data as described in your POS system instructions Item weight is displayed on the Remote Display and or the host display 3 Remove the item from the weigh platter 3 4 Magellan 8300 8400 Operational Controls Operational Controls The function of scanner and scale controls and indicators is listed in Appendix A LED Beeper Indications amp Controls Turn to that appendix for full details Operational Modes The scanner or scanner scale features a number of modes that are impor tant to both the user and the system support personnel These modes can be combined into three groups pre operational operational and addi tional functions The following text describes these modes what they mean and how and when they are seen Power Up Selftest amp Pre Operation Pre Operation describes those steps that must be successfully completed before the scanner sounds the initial good read tone and illuminates the lamps indicating the scanner and or scale are ready f
99. 0 Keyboard Wedge USB Keyboard Features Keyboard Interface Caps Lock State continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan K STATE SHIFT CAPS LOCK STATE CAPS LOCK COMPENSATION MODE Product Reference Guide 6 155 Keyboard Interface Keyboard Simulation Enables disables ability of scanner to perform host communications nor mally performed by attached keyboard 2 This feature does not apply to the USB Keyboard interface NOTE All PCs check the keyboard status during the power on Selftest It is rec ommended that you enable this function if you are working without a keyboard installation It simulates keyboard timing and passes the key board status to the PC during power on To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code OARD SIMULATION 6 156 Magellan 8300 8400 D SIMULATION Keyboard Wedge USB Keyboard Features Keyboard Interface Control Characters Specifies how the scanner transmits ASC
100. 0 8400 Calibration Verification KilogkalTis sinesoncacacounsonenazdandacnsmaneneaomedadagened nawexacmangnenmiaemamenaaars 5 11 Increasing Load Fest Phase T cssciwiacestaaiawiscasiessacadesmelaaveaddaadnaanhtadtataandetonatiaeeadaames 5 11 Shift Test MOBIC e 5 12 Increasing Load Test Phase 2 ee exeo wun Gu ena RO odi od F RR RA EE 513 Blanking TeSt eI re neo Gi uan pu WG Yi y O nU RR DD DR PE Ke Das ke Fer SANE TN MD RODY 5 14 Decreasingslogd TESE aem GOD GEG AD nn YU Fad RO OD Ge GOFOD GR RE 5 15 Returmito Zero TESE eer TIED ILI IL 5 15 Introduction to Label Programming eng iad dann D RUG uc porum DNE ER RAM aa DEG o CO FA RENE 6 1 Understanding tHEIBASIGS 1 52 e prie hehe iiidid a cd RA HF DREF FFR 6 1 Integrating the Scanner With Your Host System us ieiiieiia i iaw FRY tute crx ei ie i i BY 6 2 Customizing Your Scanners Operati0f ra Mao eiu he cut pe une Fen uere uus dd OD En Sw cS 6 2 Programming OVERVIEW uxscsentatusserat ti quisdincni ee xorebtatinbsel DG pe GRUD SES up OES i UE did Re RAT PESE FA 6 4 Programming Via handheld Device isissoous oues pcc nts naeia ED DUR TR DRURDI ADI EN CMM EE 6 4 What Is Programming Mode een eu te ea io seit en secu Ou n Mi Bg cota ubt e DEN HMM RENS 6 5 Entering and Exiting Programming MOGB xi 5 eit saarissa rr I PRI e nra 6 5 Programming SESSION s xossinosipes inum e residen Dade Gn EG YE Re uM tale do Uo wd SE UE nea Rd an 6 6 LED anid Beeper Indicators ee i aew dw FR Y Ri d
101. 00 pounds or 0 000 kilograms Press lightly on the weigh platter of the scanner scale with one hand and at the same time press and release the Zero Push Button on the operators panel The Yellow LED should turn Off and the Remote Display should not display 0 00 pounds or 0 000 kilograms Remove your hand from the weighing platform and verify that the Yellow LED is On and the Remote Display reads 0 00 pounds or 0 000 kilograms Automatic Zero Tracking Test This test verifies that the scanner scale automatic zero tracking mecha nism is operating correctly L Place 0 006 pounds 3 grams for metric on the center of the weigh ing platform The entire weight must be placed on the weighing platform at once for this test to be valid The Yellow LED should go Off and the Remote Display should read 0 01 pounds 0 005 kilo grams The scanner scale has an adaptive zero capture mechanism that re zeros the scale over time if there is a slow change in the zero level thus if all the weight is not placed on the weighing surface at one time the Yellow LED will remain On and the Remote Display will read 0 00 pounds 0 000 kilograms When the weight is removed the Yellow LED will turn off and the display will show a minus sign _ _ Press the Zero Push Button to re zero the scale 1 Yellow LED indications can be configured via feature programming and may not be enabled for certain functions Product Reference Guide 5 3 Pr
102. 006 13 0004 Cold Dry 10 C 1 5 RH Warm Wet 25 C 50 RH Temperature 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 F Electrical Specifications Before installation always verify that the site s electrical service meets the scanner scale s requirements The scanner has been engineered for com patibility with most international electrical systems operating in ranges from 100 to 240VAC at 50 60 Hz Verify that the power source will sup ply clean electrical power to the equipment that is it must be free of excess electrical noise 1 10 Magellan 8300 8400 Electrical Specifications Power Supply 7 NOTE N CAUTION Power Off the Terminal P O T Certain units can receive power directly from the terminal P O T A USB adapter brick connects the scanner to IBM USB 12V ports Power supplied from the terminal does not include auxiliary power for alterna tive scales AC Adapter Units which do not receive power directly from the terminal will use either a Listed Class 2 or Listed LPS power source which supplies power directly to the unit When using such an AC Adapter make sure to con nect using the correct IEC power cord for unigue and international power connections If the cord will not plug into your AC power receptacle the power cord shipped is not compatible with your electrical system Please contact your distributor immediately to receive the necessary information and componen
103. 1 EAN 8 Minimum Segment Length continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan MINIMU M SEGMENT LENGTH 7 CHARAC T LENGTH 6 212 Magellan 8300 8400 EAN 8 Enable EAN 8 Minimum Segment Length continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan MUM SEGMENT 9 CHARA Product Reference Guide 6 213 MUM SEGMENT LENGTH 10C EAN 8 Minimum Segment Length continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan M SEGMENT LENGTH 11 CHARACTE MUM SEGMENT LENGTH 12 C 6 214 Magellan 8300 8400 EAN 8 Enable EAN 8 Minimum Segment Length continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan EAN 8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH 13 CHARACTERS LENGTH 14C Product Reference Guide 6 215 EAN 8 Minimum Segmen
104. 1 singapore scanning datalogic com Iberia Datalogic Scanning SAS Sucursal en Espa a Telephone 34 91 746 28 60 spain scanning datalogic com United Kingdom Datalogic Scanning LTD Telephone 44 0 1582 464900 uk scanning datalogic com S DATALOGIC 2006 2012 Datalogic Scanning Inc www scanning datalogic com Datalogic Scanning Inc 959 Terry Street Eugene OR 97402 USA Telephone 541 683 5700 Fax 541 345 7140 820032914 Rev V August 2012
105. 2 Magellan 8300 8400 RS 232 Features RS 232 Retry on ACK NAK Timeout This option specifies the action scanner performs on expiration of the RS 232 ACK NAK Timeout Value To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code 232 RETRY ON ACK NAK TIMEOUT DISABL Y ON ACK NAK TIMEOUT Product Reference Guide 6 123 RS 232 ACK NAK Timeout Value This item specifies the time the scanner will wait for an ACK character from the host following a label transmission 0 Infinite timeout e 1 75 Timeout in 200 millisecond increments To set the ACK NAK Timeout Value 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code below SET RS 232 ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired timeout A setting of 0 specifies an infinite time out The remaining selectable range is 1 75 which is the timeout in 200 millisecond increments Pad all single
106. 232 devices onto the same cable is necessary If for example one of the devices in the chain is a terminal where someone is entering data while another person is simultaneously scanning a bar code requiring transmis sion to the host the scanner will wait for the RS 232 channel to be quiet for a specified period of time set via RS 232 Host Echo Quiet Interval The scanner can be set to observe this delay before sending its data in order to avoid RS 232 transmission conflicts When RS 232 Host Echo is enabled the following features are ignored RS 232 Software Flow Control and RS 232 ACK NAK Enable as well as all other ACK NAK related operations plus processing of RS 232 host com mands To enable disable this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code RS 232 HOST ECHO DISABLE 232 HOST ECHO EN RS ABLE Product Reference Guide 6 109 RS 232 Host Echo Quiet Interval This setting specifies the time interval of RS 232 channel inactivity which must transpire before the scanner will break the host echo loop to transmit the bar code data that has just been scanned to the
107. 24 99 and 25 01 Ib 3 Placean additional five pounds in the center of the weighing surface increasing the load to 30 0 pounds and check that the display reads between 29 99 and 30 01 Ib 4 Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0 00 Blanking Test This test ensures that the scanner scale will indicate its weighing capability has been exceeded if a weight greater than 0 05 pounds over its maximum upper weight limit is placed upon the unit 1 Place weights that total the upper weight limit plus 0 051 pounds on the scale For example If the upper limit is set at 30 pounds place weights equaling 30 051 pounds 2 Verify that the display shows a dash and three hyphens _ This is the overweight indication 7 Thescanner scale may blank show an underscore and three hyphens at any weight greater than its upper limit but must blank when the upper limit plus 0 051 pounds are set upon the weighing surface NOTE Product Reference Guide 5 9 Decreasing Load Test This test ensures that the scanner scale responds properly when a heavy object is followed by a significantly smaller object 1 Place a 30 0 pound load on the scale and verify that the display shows between 29 99 and 30 01 pounds If the upper weight limit for your scale is not set at 30 pounds begin by plac ing weight egualing your upper limit setting NOTE 2 Remove weights to leave 20 pounds on the scale Check that the dis play show
108. 2937 D352938 D352939 e D358588 e D361565 e D372234 e D374630 e D374869 e D375493 e D376357 D377345 D377346 D377347 D377348 D388075 D446524 e D606544 EP0256296 e EP0260155 e EP0260156 EP0295936 e EP0325469 e EP0349770 EP0368254 e EP0442215 e EP0498366 EP0531645 e EP0663643 e EP0698251 e EP01330772 EP870761 GB2252333 GB2284086 GB2301691 e GB2304954 GB2307093 GB2308267 GB2308678 GB2319103 e GB2333163 GB2343079 GB2344486 GB2345568 GB2354340 ISR107546 ISR118507 ISR118508 JP1962823 JP1971216 JP2513442 JP2732459 JP2829331 JP2953593 JP2964278 MEX185552 e MEX187245 RE37166 RE40071 Other Patents Pending Table of Contents Chapter 1 Introduction uii iei Y PRAE EUN C iii airtel Ta ManualVOverVi W suee ee an go Gl YN Ed YG gd aE 1 1 How to Use This Manual iscecctacssisncesigebesssnensierreduiadumnanaisucebersaameviaeaeiedahaatnd did ga ERES 1 2 Technical SupP9ort sein ei Onen 1 4 Datalogic Webslte SUppDOFt 2ciccccdccscieiassiandeentadeccsgastdaasaeabanasisaagadeacedecaiadicaanaeabanasiaaage 1 4 Datalogic Website TekFOruim c eie tx me OG GRUFF ta DOG di DDO yy o n 1 4 Reseller rechmical SUppOrU ei uei WC DN GG EI S GR O YE GU 1 4 Telephone Technical Support i252 ae epe RR y GU tatam RIO DR a ADY CC N Sid ET RF B 1 4 Scanner and Scanner Scale Nomenclature 3 Lor uod 4 IOR Y ER RAGOR ROED Sr O DU DORRODD UR 1 5 CONNECTIONS FFEFRIR FYR FF FR
109. 8 Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled To set this feature Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scanthe bar code SET UPC A 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the fac ing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET UPC A 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6 169 UPC A Minimum Reads Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a UPC A label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the f
110. 8300 8400 Calibration Verification U S Pounds Calibration Verification U S Pounds Once you have completed the calibration sequence you may be required to perform these step by step verification procedures These procedures follow the National Institute of Standards and Technology Handbook 44 guidelines for grocery scale installations You may be required by state or local law to have these procedures performed by a certified technician or verified by a proper official These calibration verification procedures cover five different tests e Increasing Load Test Shift Test e Blanking Test e Decreasing Load Test e Return to Zero Test Increasing Load Test Phase 1 This test checks Scale operation with five ten and fifteen pound weights 1 Check that the display reads 0 00 lb when at rest with nothing on the weighing surface The Yellow LED is steadily lit 2 Place a five pound weight on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 5 00 lb 3 Place an additional five pounds on the center of the weighing sur face and check that the display reads between 9 99 and 10 01 Ib 4 Place an additional five pounds on the center of the weighing sur face and check that the display reads between 14 99 and 15 01 Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0 00 5 You have completed the Increasing Load Test Phase 1 Product Reference Guide 5 7 Shift Test The Shift Test chec
111. 8400 Flowcharts Remote Scale Status Problem Display Lamp Description Cannot zero at power up or weight remains on scale for more than 2 minutes or weight has not returned to zero between POS weight requests 0 Off a This is a configurable feature Flowcharts Action Required Check debris chutes Verify that the weigh platter moves freely Remove item s from scale Press Scale Zero Push Button for more information f the scale still fails to zero recali brate the scale The problem isolation flowcharts on the following pages allow you to identify and troubleshoot problems with your system Product Reference Guide 4 7 Figure 4 2 Problem Isolation Start Power up _ Scanner power up is signified by any or all of the following Facet wheel shows movement Lasers turn on Status LED s turn on Speaker sounds tone s Remote display shows message A single red dot is visible on the 7 segment display Flashing Green LED If the Green LED is flashing slowly the scanner is most likely in Sleep Mode Press and release the Volume Tone Push Button or wave your hand in front of the vertical window to wake up the scanner A flashing Green LED can also mean the scanner has been disabled by the POS terminal To exit this mode cycle ower or have the terminal re enable he scanner Selftest Failure If the scanner fails its Selftest the following takes place Spe
112. 98875 E212345 EAN 8 5 Digit addon E400210126 E212345 EAN 13 5 Digit addon E01101234567891 E212345 UPC A E3006099201 118712345 UPC E E3000000099887512345 EAN 13 E3110123456789112345 G 12 Magellan 8300 8400 Code 39 Check character must be included in label data Label length including start stop and check characters and exclud ing prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner s fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type Start and stop characters Prefix must be ASCII characters AO or JAI Example A0Code 39 TEST must be included in label Codabar Check character must be included in label data Label length including check character and excluding prefix charac ters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner s fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type Prefix must be ASCII characters FO Start stop character sets must meet the matching requirement set forth by the scanner configuration item Codabar Start Stop Character Match Start stop character sets s must be of the form ABCD ABCD and must be included in the label Example F0s 99 95s the lower case s at each end of the example is a placeholder for the start stop character set MSI Plessey Check character must be included in label data Label length including check character and excluding prefix charac t
113. AC DC Power Supply should have an AC outlet with a clean earth ground If you are not sure how to verify the amount of electrical noise interference on the power line ask a qualified electrician to measure the input line voltage 2 10 Magellan 8300 8400 Checkstand Preparation Checkstand Preparation Reference Figure 2 6 When performing a first time installation into a new checkstand verify before cutting that room will be allowed for cabling the AC DC Power Supply and any EAS peripheral equipment such as controller boxes etc When making the opening take extra care to accurately cut to the correct dimensions Mounting may require instal lation of support s countertop routing or other such devices Depending upon checkstand design you may wish to install an item diverter to direct items toward the scan window See the instructions in this manual titled Counter Cutout for more details concerning the location and prepara tion of the opening Figure 2 6 Installation Overview Connector Bulkheads Item Diverter AC DC Power Supply if used Box Product Reference Guide 2 11 Liquid Spills and Moisture Select a checkstand design which allows fluids to flow through and directs liquids away from any electronic equipment or storage areas Counter Cutout The most important consideration when planning the counter opening for the scanner is the operator s comfortable reaching distance The ideal
114. AN 13 1 2 petitor testen CR DA CG FR Un E Sa Al nn a GR n Sn DAS 6 196 EAN 8 JAN 8 Guard InsertiOD si ota Ee a ERU pO erm FFO ROGER GROG iU M FEES 6 197 EAN 8 JAN 8 Guard Substitution 22 pizca rne E eux idd ADRA EA DR RAT YN E TIMES ERA RR RR IRAN 6 198 EAN 8 JAN 8 Both Guards SubDStitutiOn x m peu copa rane ea RR dd AUR DG S cERdo DurV IRAN 6 199 EAN gt S Stitch Exact Label HalV amp S ueu EA i LORA diw iN PE UR RI DIR a MIR erc O a REED hace pa 6 200 EAN 9 Stitch Unlike Label Halves eti arise inet tenetis te peer A ve etc inen ti DD Ng 6 201 EANG Eabel ID 25 site O CD Tie TEA Dn acne dete gi TH sues Eni Giana lod Cf Ef A 6 202 EAN 8 2 Digit Supplemental Lapel ID 42 552 5 bati pta chu aae ESO YCH Y A GRO A GR En yR 6 203 EAN 8 5 Digit Supplemental Label ID 2 55 3 x2 poe ton tite noaa AUD GO DON YO O FAU 6 204 EAN 8 128 Supplemental Label TD 1 9 2 i GR aaan an 6 205 EAN 8 Decoding Level8 eiii ein OE Di bandas Md Fn GE a a aaa einen 6 206 EANsS9 Minimukm Reads cennin Hi ar Gu GA GN ly na rea AER E 6 209 Product Reference Guide Vv EAN S Minimum Segment Length scene ui ed oi aono np HERE ddd namie DEN GOG GG DYA 6 211 Other UPC EAN Options i 3354kii ohh Er AR REG OR FYNN A RAA DRUENI RANU BRAU GO RW RD EEan AE 6 217 uapscm eeuSprIo dee IER 6 218 P Store Label Minimum Beacons Ru ee Genau GE in Pi RF altem ioe pends etal ddd RC nate MUS 6 221 Enable EAN Two Labeli 5 raten mer rUE tesa va Geir Cn IU RR adn OF Fon A OR indie DEA
115. CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6 195 Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13 Enables disables expansion of EAN JAN 8 labels to EAN JAN 13 To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code D EAN JAN 8 TO EAN JAN 13 DIS EAN JAN 8 TO EAN JAN 13 6 196 Magellan 8300 8400 EAN 8 Enable EAN 8 JAN 8 Guard Insertion Enables Disables the ability of the scanner to insert a guard pattern into an otherwise complete EAN 8 segment it has received To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH EAN 8 JAN 8 GUARD INSERTION DISABLE bar code N 8 GUARD INSERTION Product Reference Guide 6 197 EAN 8 JAN 8 Guard Substitution
116. D out Transmit Data output 7 N C No Connection 8 N C No Connection GND Signal Ground 10 N C No Connection B 2 Magellan 8300 8400 Introduction RS 232 Cable Pinout continued Scale Connector Hardware RJ45 10 Position Cable Pinout Table B 2RS 232 Scale Cable Pinouts PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION 1 5V pullup 5V pullup 2 CTS IN Clear To Send input 3 N C No Connection 4 RTS OUT Reguest To Send output 5 RxD IN Receive Data Input 6 TxD OUT Transmit Data output 7 N C No Connection 8 N C No Connection 9 Gnd Signal Ground 10 N C No Connection Product Reference Guide B 3 IBM Cable Pinout Scanner and Scale Connector Hardware RJ45 10 Position Cable Pinout Table B 3IBM Cable Pinouts PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION 1 N C No Connection 2 N C No Connection 3 N C No Connection 4 LINEB Line B 5 N C No Connection 6 LINEA Line A 7 N C No Connection 8 N C No Connection 9 GND Signal Ground 10 N C No Connection MagellanTM 8300 8400 OEM USB Cable Pinout OEM USB Cable Pinout Scanner and Scale Connector Hardware RJ45 10 Position Cable Pinout Table B 4 OEM USB Cable Pinouts PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION 1 N C No Connection 2 N C No Connection 3 VBUS USB VBUS 4 USB D USB D 5 N C No Connection 6 USB D USB D 7 N C No Con
117. E Timeout to 600ms TEST MODE DISABLE TEST MODE ENABLE 6 11 Product Reference Guide General Scanner Features Scanner Button Options Allows configuration of the scanner volume button to different modes of operation e Disable Scanner Button Disables all button functions e Enable Standard Functions Enables volume tone and reset e Enable Reset Only The buttons sole function will be to reset the scanner To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code BUTTON OPTIONS DISABLE 6 12 Magellan 8300 8400 General Scanner Features Scanner Button Options continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan R BUTTON OPTIONS ENABLE STANDARD F BUTTON OPT Product Reference Guide 6 13 Double Read Timeout The Double Read Timeout feature sets a time limit that determines how much time must pass befo
118. EAN 8 label ID to be added to bar code data 7 NOTE To set this feature The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled To set this feature 2 Scan the SWITCH bar code Scan the bar code SET EAN 8 LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET EAN 8 LABEL ID 6 202 Magellan 8300 8400 EAN 8 Enable EAN 8 2 Digit Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies an EAN 8 2 Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is d
119. EVEN e RS 232 PARITY ODD To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code below or on the following pages representing the desired Parity setting You ll need to cover any unused bar codes as well as facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code 2 PARITY 6 102 Magellan 8300 8400 RS 232 Features RS 232 Parity continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan RS 232 PARITY EVEN RS 232 PARITY ODD Product Reference Guide 6 103 RS 232 Hardware Control Enables disables use of the RS 232 CTS signal for flow control and or scan control Options are e Disable The scanner transmits to the host regardless of any activ ity on the CTS line e Enable CTS Flow Control The CTS signal controls transmission of data to the host e Enable CTS Scan Control The CTS line must be active for scan ner to read and transmit data While the CTS line is inactive scan ner remains in a host disabled state following a successful label transmission the CTS signal must transition to inactive and then to active to enable scanning for the next label e Enable Magellan SL CTS scan control Emulates default Magel lan SL setting for this feature To set th
120. Enable Enable Enable Enable Code 39 Minimum Reads Pharmacode 39 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Enable Pharmacode 39 Start Stop Character Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Transmission Pharmacode 39 Check Character Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Transmission Pharmacode 39 Label ID Code 128 Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable F 12 MagellanTM 8300 8400 Wincor RS 232 Keybd RS 232 Nixdorf Single Wedge IBM OEM USB Cable Code 128 Transmt Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Function Characters Convert Code 12810 phe Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Code 39 Code 128 Label ID K B3 Code 128 Length Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Control Code 128 Length 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Code 128 Length 2 80 80 80 80 80 80 Code 128 Correlation Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Code 128 Stitching Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Code 128 Minimum 1 1 1 1 1 1 Reads EAN 128 Enable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable EAN 128 Label ID None P None None interleaved 208 12 m Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable of 5 Enable 2015 Check Char phe Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable acter Calculation iu Check Char Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enab
121. Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type since you can cause damage to the scanner and or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface ALWAYS make interface selections with the host CAUTION cable DISCONNECTED E TYPE KEYBOAR 6 65 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Wedge B Interface Selection Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type since you can cause damage to the scanner and or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface ALWAYS make interface selections with the host CAUTION cable DISCONNECTED E TYPE KEYBOAR 6 66 Magellan 8300 8400 Interface Related Features Keyboard Wedge C Interface Selection Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type since you can cause damage to the scanner and or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface ALWAYS make interface selections with the host CAUTION cable DISCONNECTED ACE TYPE KEYBOAR 6 67 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Wedge D Interface Selection Remember t
122. HR FED RY FFF FFF A FF HF FD 1 6 Physical Parameters ci GO RE Gn GOR GN Gn E P NUN Y GA ly diy LWC RANE 1 7 ell UTEM 1 7 Deactivating EAS Labels ns obas spesug xesawene titer orotabunssu Issa E FO ERN a EI i GOR IR ERN NES 1 7 Weiging sienna caddy E TH FFR FF FE ROGA Ga 1 8 Warmup TME aaa nw Ad E Mn FY Yn ARG AINA EA GAR NEUE 1 9 Electrical Specifications ci Gi un GO RE o RR GR E FRS GY OE Fn o 1 10 POWer SUPPLY mr 1 11 Laser and Product Safety cui dus oarsosie desees arus urA donecxesatup iret itu e nds uada lud insta ewe quaes 1 12 Canadian NOTICE ccsssic ti e GENOD ddd GOFOD DE O On RR GOD NUS UU BEND MIN ERE FIG 1 13 Epis TUTTI 1 14 Agency ComplianceS x5 rues GEG Gn AU GUDD cUm NNNM RG aS 1 15 Bar Codes Supported ee iin uu EE mh Gale E Cd Y TE M ET ill d ff i Fas 1 17 eed iir GY YG GN CNC aaa FR aA ASA y 1 17 green me HEFFER HF HEFFER FF RF EFE deeded FRY NF FFF 1 17 Dial Bar Codes for Japan 2 labelmread eiu eu GU pain eps o o DO 1 18 Chapter 2 Site Preparation and Installation e eee 27 loea 2 2 Prie Installation Consideratloris i tarot ehe o ee CORD GR Re t OW Gn GR GON NEN nM CE SEE 2 3 Checkstand DESIO t EU n 2 4 Stanmer Pnstallatioli p rem 2 5 Scanner Ms rin a inps ops 2 5 aig evt CHE 2 5 ere inmiUErr 4e na RR a DL a a aa non GG ON OER DDOE 2 5 Site Preparation OVerVIBW iei nain O GB ff YG GG AD UR CLR unte DUNT RR RRE BESTE 2 6 Ventilation arid Spang zresa raisni naaa Go dna Cd RF ea
123. IBM Features IBM Number of Host Resets Specifies how many consecutive resets are processed before the scanner starts a five second period during which a user is allowed to enter label programming mode and configure the scanner To set the number of host resets 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET IBM NUMBER OF HOST RESETS You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired number of host resets The selectable range is 1 15 resets Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 001 015 Examples 001 1 reset 005 5 resets 011 11 resets 4 The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned SET IBM NUMBER OF HOST RESETS Product Reference Guide 6 89 IBM Scale Address This feature applies to IBM Port 17 ONLY NOTE Specifies IBM scale address for IBM Port 17 The following three addresses are available 6A 6B 6E To set the IBM Scale Address 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code below or from the following page that represents the desired scale address designation 3 Complete the programming seguence by scanning the SWI
124. II control characters to the host This feature does not apply to the USB Keyboard interface NOTE Choices are e Disable Control Characters e Enable transmission of control characters to host Send characters between 00H and 1FH according to a special func tion key mapping table This is used to send keys that are not in the normal ASCII set a unique set is provided for each available scancode set Reference Appendix E Keyboard Function Key Map pings To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your choice from the Control Characters feature bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the fac ing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code CONTROL C HARACTERS DISABLE Product Reference Guide 6 157 Keyboard Interface Control Characters contin ued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan NTROL CHARACTERS ENABLE TRANSMISSION OF CTL CHARACTERS CHARACTERS ENABLE FUNCTION KEY MAPPING 6 158 Magellan 8300 8400 Keyboard Wedge USB Keyboard Features Keyboard Interface Intercharact
125. IN conversion is enabled and Code 128 supplemental addon bar code labels are converted The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET GTIN CODE 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their correspond ing Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF for each of the two characters 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET GTIN CODE 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6 253 DataBar Omnidirectional Enable Enables disables the ability of the scanner to decode DataBar Omnidirec tional labels This value added feature is a factory program
126. INOUT ue c Hem Scanner and Scale 12 55 oa ee ieIs A inen ada ID Ge taal OF dr dU OEM USB Cable PINOUT 1 1 2 re recte niet beca cub DR ve CAR iD DOR Inga cR ands FO ia DRE AR ER Scanner and Scale enau GU GRY a aia GY DROE GUDD PE e DUAE DRO ERES Auxilliary Port asu EUMD External Handheld Input see i Fa OG du YG Pre recti RO da eus o Reel UR DRO OF Power Cablg eln iY sanz OA dyf do Y Cn Rd Rd DR O dud AG did eee Connector Hardware eisau GG Morc Ban ez tevteusiaaerl E A EA E EETAS Remote Display aain GR EMI OD RO DN ER RANA DES UE n IDA DRIN IA RESI DDOD RR Connector HardWare 22 surececiisulenssse iter osse res Fn dU CG E DA BN FdA A GOD RD LA RADAR EAS Commi Port Sensormatic systems ONLY ue aui Cau di RR FU ED UR EAS Deactivator Control Box COnmeChiom 35x aia Sanau iia sale Gloi dod a Cyd YT a TE iU Appendix C Keypad eiiwe ui Y NU Wiw wau aan Cel Appendix D Host Commands eren eene en RR RR Ru D 71 Accepting Commands from an RS 232 Scanner HOSt eiii netten YW CO di is Appendix E Keyboard Function Key Mappings E 1 Keyboard Model Cross Referefice coe esoetrrech ladda cuc UR Ue ud GEIR YAR E FU UR UU uu dE dud TF HR Appendix F Factory Defaults eere rernm POL Appendix G Handheld Data Format Requirements G 1 Handheld Data Format Requirements General nere rernm rte ena dec nta diee tna arn v
127. M F4 6Bh 1Ah SUB F5 6Ch 1Bh ESC ESC 3Dh 1Ch FS F7 6Eh 1Dh GS F8 6Fh 1Eh RS F9 70h 1Fh US F10 71h Product Reference Guide E 7 Table E 7 NEC 9801 Key Function Key Map ASCII value ASCII code Key Scancode 00h NUL unused n a 01h SOH CR 1Ch 02h STX CAPS LOCK ON make 71h 03h ETX CAPS LOCK OFF break F1h 04h EOT CTRL left Make 74h 05h ENQ CTRL left Break F4h 06h ACK CTRL C 60h 07h BEL n a n a 08h BS BS 0Eh 09h HT TAB right OFh 0Ah LF RIGHT arrow inner keypad 3Ch 0Bh VT TAB left OFh S OCh FF DELETE 39h 0Dh CR CR 1Ch 0Eh SO INSERT inner keypad 38h OFh SI KATAKANA LOCK ON Make 72h 10h DLE KATAKANA LOCK OFF Break F2h 1th DC1 HOME inner keypad 3Eh 12h DC2 LEFT arrow inner keypad 3Bh 13h DC3 DOWN arrow inner keypad 3Dh 14h DC4 UP arrow inner keypad 3Ah 15h NAK F6 67h 16h SYN F1 62h 17h ETB F2 63h 18h CAN F3 64h 19h EM F4 65h 1Ah SUB F5 66h 1Bh ESC ESC 00h 1Ch FS F7 68h 1Dh GS F8 69h 1Eh RS F9 6Ah 1Fh US F10 6Bh E 8 Magellan 8300 8400 Keyboard Model Cross Reference Table E 8 USB Keyboard Function Key Usage Map ASCII Key Value Usage Name 00 NUL ALT right Make 01 SOH ALT right Break 02 STX F11 03 ETX F12 04 EOT GUI right Make 05 ENO GUI right Break 06 ACK CT
128. O Gu Coe pax Cw ENEA RC NICHE RM TENER MN ORUM 6 271 Code 39 kabel ID PEE ETT 6 272 Code 39 Require Quiet ZONES ae ua tette cR GR FR GU nan ant Ela e RI NID HUP MUST INE 6 273 Code 39 Length Control eu sos een tmd odi FR GO Gi NE GU MED GR 6 274 Code 39 LEengtli A 1 253 5 5 FEE enian acoge re RO AN N no ui OR RE Cog di aT rg TN TR OM RT UN RD 6 275 Code 39 Lemngtil2 iusixsteauesediskstcetumu MU DE SRM RIRER NNUS SK GG GY ddd GERDD Gi FO 6 276 Code 39 Conrelation a GA EF Y HEFFER FN 6 277 Code 29 Stitchind cec GORF DY GR GO FEE GN FIVE Gad ag Dda 6 278 Code 39 MiDimium edd Sc ame uad DR OD Tu Ce O Gw O dd ANG daa iD 6 279 Pharmacode 39 Enable 11 2 ec GDG ADD R R od ses ame NG innia APP rcg RR M ener Pe RR UR RI RUNS 6 281 Pharmacode 39 Start Stop Character TransmlissSiOD 2 255 etn t DRA RR GO GR DEUS ND 6 282 Pharmacode 39 Check Character Tr ansmissiOb 52 croceo GL GADO E or GORAU ek RE 6 283 Phanmacode 39 abel ID errioan DR AFU nada shen FU MEE M ER MRNA OA MERE 6 284 Code 129 Ena Ble iu ce apenas nas na sin E DD DU y EU Uid Dcus E 6 285 MagellanTM 8300 8400 Code 128 Transmit Function Characters ressorsa NRE 6 286 Convert Code 128 to Code 39 2425 passu te ibas dua a Ob DEAU RR DOR FRAU 6 287 Code 128 Label T D en GDG cuna pns RO GOG GR ND Did OU tees 6 288 Code 129 Length Control iuuentus Minna uitae odes uinea tutius Fe sak GAA ali LG YT US 6 289 Code 128 Length p Mtt 6 290 Code 128 Length 2 gae au Guard OUD EIER
129. ODE 39 DS 3 MINIMUM REA COD READS 4 6 280 Magellan 8300 8400 E 39 MINIMUM Pharmacode 39 Enable Pharmacode 39 Enable Enables disables the ability of the scanner to decode Italian Pharmacode 39 labels To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code PHARMACO DISABLE DE 39 PHARMACODE 39 ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6 281 Pharmacode 39 Start Stop Character Transmission Enables disables transmission of start and stop characters for Pharmacode 39 To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code ACODE 39 START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION DISABLE MACODE 39 STA P CHARACTER TRANSMISSION 6 282 Magellan 8300 8400 Pharmacode 39 Enable Pharmacode 39 Check Charact
130. Operational Tests These are the tests that run continually during Normal Operation and Sleep Mode Firmware checks all subsystems accessory connections and the POS interface to verify everything is operating normally If a problem is detected at any time a long low tone is sounded an error code is shown on the 7 segment display and operation may be halted If you press the Volume Tone Push Button at that time a series of tones will be sounded that matches the error code displayed Diagnostic Tests See Chapter 2 Diagnostic Modes for details about running diagnostic tests for the scanner and or scale If a problem is discovered during diag nostics the scanner will provide feedback about the source of the prob lem The remainder of this chapter describes these failure indications and includes troubleshooting flowcharts to help isolate the problem Diagnostic Procedures Your Point Of Sale POS system may contain many components that operate as a system Since almost all scanner or scale problems are caused by either the scanner scale POS terminal or communication links between them these troubleshooting flowcharts focus on these compo nents Additionally the optional Remote Scale Display AC DC Power Supply and their cables are potential problems addressed in this chapter The flowcharts provided in this chapter walk you through a diagnostic process that will isolate the failed component and instruct as to the correc tive actio
131. R CALCULATION ENA Product Reference Guide 6 299 I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission Enables disables transmission of an optional Interleaved 2 of 5 check char acter This feature applies only when 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation is enabled NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION DISABLE 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION ENABLE 6 300 Magellan 8300 8400 Interleaved 2 of 5 I 2 of 5 Enable I 2 of 5 Label ID This feature specifies an I 2 of 5 label ID to be added to bar code data The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET I 2 of 5 LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 S
132. RL right Make 07 BEL CTRL right Break 08 BS BS 09 HT TAB right 0A LF RIGHT arrow inner keypad 0B VT TAB left 0C FF Enter right keypad 0D CR CR 0E SO INSERT inner keypad OF SI PAGE UP inner keypad 10 DLE PAGE DOWN inner keypad 11 DC1 HOME inner keypad 12 DC2 LEFT arrow inner keypad 13 DC3 DOWN arrow inner keypad 14 DC4 UP arrow inner keypad 15 NAK F6 16 SYN F1 17 ETB F2 18 CAN F3 19 EM FA 1A SUB F5 1B ESC ESC 1C FS F7 1D GS F8 1E RS F9 1F US F10 Product Reference Guide NOTES E 10 Magellan 8300 8400 Appendix F Factory Defaults The following table provides a listing of the most common factory settings for the interfaces shown Table F 1 Factory Default Settings Wincor P9232 Keybd RS 232 Nixdorf Single Wedge IBM OEM USB Cable Spanner Buan Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Options Std Std Std Std Std Std p Functions Functions Functions Functions Functions Functions n PA The 400ms 400ms 400ms 400ms 400ms 400ms Laser Timeout 5 min 5 min 5 min 5 min 5 min 5 min Motor Timeout 10 min 10 min 10 min 10 min 10 min 10 min Label Gone Timeout 160 msec 160msec 160msec 160msec 160msec 160 msec Enable Auxiliary Port Mode Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Handheld AAA Part Bawi 19200 19200 19200 19200 19200 19200 Rate Laser Failure Mode Single OK Single OK Si
133. RT bar code Product Reference Guide 6 113 L INVERT INVER RS 232 ICL DC1 Character Delay Enable Enables disables the ability of the scanner to delay a DC1 response for 40 milliseconds To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for this feature You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code DC1 CHARACTER DELAY 232 ICL DC1 CHARACTER DELAY ENAB 6 114 Magellan 8300 8400 RS 232 Features RS 232 Team POS ICL Scale Enables disables the ability of the scanner to enter TEAM POS ICL Scale mode To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for this feature You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code M POS ICL SCALE MODE 32 TEAM POS ICL SCALE MODE ENAB
134. SB Keyboard Features Keyboard Interface Keyboard Layout continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan D LAYOUT D LAYOUT Product Reference Guide 6 151 Keyboard Interface Keyboard Layout continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan ARD LAYOUT ROM 6 152 Magellan 8300 8400 D LAYOUT Keyboard Wedge USB Keyboard Features Keyboard Interface Keyboard Layout continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan D LAYOUT P Keyboard Interface Quiet Interval Specifies amount of time to look for keyboard activity before scanner breaks keyboard connection in order to transmit data to host To set the Keyboard Interface Quiet Interval 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code below SET KEYBOARD INTERFACE QUIET INTERVAL You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired delay The selectable range
135. SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming seguence by scanning the SWITCH bar DE 128 ADD ONS MINIMUM R code DE 128 ADD ONS MINIMUM Product Reference Guide 6 247 Code 128 Add ons Minimum Reads continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan CODE 128 AD MUM READS 3 D ONS MINI D ONS MINIM CODE 128 AD UM READS 4 6 248 Magellan 8300 8400 GTIN Enable GTIN Enable Enables Disables the ability to convert UPCE UPCA EANS and EAN13 labels into the GTIN 14 character format If add on information is present on the base label prior to the conversion taking place the add on information will be appended to the converted GTIN bar code NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence b
136. Software whether modified or unmodified nor sell assign sublicense distribute lend rent give or otherwise transfer the Software to any other person or organization for pur poses other than as expressly provided in this Agreement without Datalogic s prior written consent 3 Transfers Support 3 4 Any copying installing reproduction remanufacture reverse engineering electronic transfer or other use of the Software on other than the desig nated Datalogic Product will be a material breach of this Agreement However Datalogic may elect not to terminate this Agreement or the granted licenses but instead may elect to notify End User that End User is deemed to have ordered and accepted a license for each breaching use End User shall pay Datalogic the applicable list price for such licenses as of the date of such breach 3 2 End User shall not sell assign sublicense distribute lend rent give or otherwise transfer the Datalogic Product to any third party unless such third party agrees with Datalogic in writing to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement Any such transfer of the Datalogic Product absent Such agreement shall be null and void 3 3 End User may obtain support for Software from Datalogic at Datalogic s standard support fees and under Datalogic s standard support terms and con ditions in effect at the time the support is requested 4 Intellectual Property End User acknowledges that the Software con
137. T WEIGHT DIGITS FOUR D Product Reference Guide 6 133 Single Cable Manufacturer Extensions Enables Disables manufacturer extensions to the Single Cable RS 232 interface These extensions communicate scale calibration information to the host To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code E CABLE MANUFACTURER EXTENSIONS E CABLE MANUFACTURER EXTENSIONS ENABLE 1 The manufacturer of the scanner 6 134 Magellan 8300 8400 Single Cable RS 232 Options Single Cable Pacesetter Plus Enable Enables disables the scanner s ability to send Pacesetter Plus information as trailers to UPC EAN label data To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH SINGLE CABLE PACESETTER PLUS DISABL bar code
138. TCH 6 324 Magellan 8300 8400 Codabar Enable Codabar Check Character Calculation Enables disables calculation and verification of an optional Codabar check character can occur When disabled any check characters in a bar code are treated as y If check character calculation is disabled the risk is increased that a misread data characters NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code DABAR CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION DISABLE CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATIO Product Reference Guide 6 325 Codabar Check Character Transmission Enables disables transmission of an optional Codabar check character Applies only when Codabar Check Character Calculation is enabled NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequen
139. TCH bar code 6 90 MagellanTM 8300 8400 IBM SCALE ADDRESS 6A IBM Features IBM Scale Address continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan IBM SCALE ADDRESS 6B Product Reference Guide 6 91 IBM SCALE ADDRESS 6E IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format This feature enables disables scanner s ability to set a symbology identifier for a specified label to Code 39 before transmitting that label data to an IBM host This applies to Code 128 Code 93 and Codabar for IBM Port 5B Code 93 and Codabar for IBM Port 9B When enabled this feature has no effect on IBM Port 17 NOTE To enable disable the IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming seguence by scanning the SWITCH bar code IBM TRANSMIT LABELS IN CODE 39 FORMAT DISABLE IBM TRANSMIT LABELS IN CODE 39 FORMAT ENABLE 6 92 MagellanTM 8300 8400 IBM Features IBM La
140. TER CTS GOES INACTIVE THEN ACTIVE RS 232 ONLY 6 42 Magellan 8300 8400 Scale Features Scale Features Scale Enable Use this feature to enable or disable scale operation Recalibration recertification may be required when adding scale functional y ity Consult your local Weights and Measures authority If this feature is enabled the scanner will expect that it is to function as a NOTE scanner scale and will indicate an error if it is not a scale equipped unit See Chapter 4 Error Codes for more information To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the two bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SCALE DISABLE SCALE ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6 43 Scale Enforced Zero Return This feature enables disables the enforced zero return of the scale Three settings are available for this feature e Disable e Scale Must Return to Zero Weight Within Two Minutes Scale will require re zeroing if a non zero weight is left on for more than two minutes or if the scale is below zero e Scale Must Return to Zero Weight Between Weight Requests Re zeroing is requ
141. UD a 6 130 Single Cabl RS 232 Stale Weight TIMEOUT iscsssseatisvevedsistandanaicidebessnaenetiweneredetonannaccs 6 131 Single Cable RS 232 Scale Transmit Weight Digits eiii kn ke GY n tee nnn nnne 6 133 Single Cable Manufacturer EXtenSiONS siinne diia aera a RA CARR RD 6 134 Single Cable Pacesetter Plus Enable 222 eire sene tr bee cune an eei edn GDG i 6 135 Single Cable RS 232 RTS CIS SelectiOlll au Guie eni WYE discas NE Fo EA Fee CLAE 6 136 Single CablerRS 232 Use BCC 2 1252 2 FREE GARO e O DR 41 Resa nA a FFR FR DE 6 139 Single Cable RS 232 Use ACK NA iai na RG RR a aiu sese EE E DDARU i dai T SSE nann Ri 6 140 Sinale Cable RS 232 Use STX iai ini npud i GCR RG CRUD ihe gene DOC i dme 6 141 Set Single Gable RS 232 STX Character si EUR NEU rusa aa ti YN FRYN sens UD GDG INNAM ERE 6 142 Set Single Cable RS 2532 ETX Character 1 iaa eec icon ERYN iet Sena den bale iin 6 143 Magellan 8300 8400 Keyboard Wedge USB Keyboard Features 1 25 rotten FR RR sade DUE NN NOU GU RR Add 6 144 Keyboard Interface Keyboard Layout iie iie eon in GaG PR dn HD YD LLON NEUE 6 144 Keyboard interface Quiet Interval sein A eei repr Rea HN reete ER me YDD Ri ER EE 6 153 Keyboard interface Caps Lock State ocio uice ense deterius rai a aE EE 6 154 Keyboard Interface Keyboard Simulation isie ui iiu etre three mener nri 6 156 Keyboard Interface Control Characters ns iiu RG EDDU FER PP rA DU ER RDMMU O ddd 6 157 Keyboard Interface Inter
142. UPC E Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable UPC E Number Sys tem Character Trans Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable mission UPC E Check Char pipe Disable Disable Disable Enable Enable acter Transmission EXPane CE le Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable UPC A Expand UPC E to EAN 13 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable UPC E Label ID E C E E UPC E 2 Digit Sup plemental Label ID E E UPC E 5 Digit Sup E C E E Product Reference Guide RS 232 R 232 Wincor Singe Keybd IBM OEM USB Nixdorf Wedge Cable UPC E 128 Supple mental Label ID E C E UPC E Minimum 2 2 2 2 o 2 Reads EAN 13 Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable EAN 19 First Charac Chae Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable ter Transmission EAN 13 Check Cha Case naa Diebe Enable Enable Enable acter Transmission EAN 13 SBN Con disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable version Enable EAN 13 Label ID F A F F EAN 13 2 Digit Sup plemental Label ID p j p EAN 13 5 Digit Sup plemental Label ID F A F F EAN 13 Minimum Reais 1 1 1 1 1 1 EAN 13 128 Supple mental Label ID i A 2 p Bookland Label ID A EAN 8 Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable EAN B Cheek Gha Enbe Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable acter Transmission Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13 Disable Disable Dis
143. UPC EAN coupon decoding Enable RSS coupon decoding To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code CONTROL 6 160 Magellan 8300 8400 Symbology Programming Coupon Control continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan CONTROL ENABLE UPC EAN COUPON DECODING ENABLE DATABAR COUPON Product Reference Guide 6 161 UPC A Enable Enables disables the ability of the scanner to decode UPC A labels To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code ABLE UPC A DIS UPC A EN ABLE 6 162 Magellan 8300 8400 UPC A Enable UPC A Number System Character Transmission Enables dis
144. WITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code EAN 128 DISABLE EAN 128 ENABLE 6 296 Magellan 8300 8400 EAN 128 Enable EAN 128 Label ID This feature specifies an EAN 128 label ID to be added to bar code data The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET EAN 128 LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanni
145. a Gilad YL UO EF UF FD Ge 2 8 Service Yee ACC 2 10 Power InstallatiOhi 2 22 52 ani siciereR eer iri p R Go al Ra cil i ip nha RNRS ERR PR DEG A CIEN cR DE RN RUD D NR RP 2 10 1a eL Late In ME FFF FFF EEF HEH AF FER PH FR HE FRI FF EF HE RF FER FE YHA RH 2 10 Checkstand Preparation rieu Hid rial Ne Od UE A Ud Und M ERE NER 2 11 Liguid Spills and MOISELER iiuaia iiti pa monen niea ge essa te ets ences spisso Ia esca Eus 2 12 Counter CULOUE eC X Xo 2 12 Checkstand MOUNEDO 2 522 erani ri Da RFC GA URL d da dd RG DD RR I SR DDOD dn MINE REI aint 2 20 Cheekstand Vibration zr Ge ud nw vate RYG mild Gy GN EG ysg YD Fn RE A 2 20 Installatiom OVenviGw aeu Tu Gi iT DRA HD E AFR 2 20 Product Reference Guide i WHPAEKING RE RR PR FFF HF YNE AF HR PR FFF HF HE IAKUEDE EF 2 21 Operational VerifiCatioli nig ian dua iL RO a eS RR Da ADO dd IMPR DNE HMM 2 22 Diagmostic Modes qoe 2 25 Cables amp ConbnectlollS cau o geneu nee eia in deat doce dw GR FIRST in na Ginataal2 clo O Gw sinis ET 2 26 Remote Scale Display Placement InstallatiQn neret hoan nerunt emer ber wa Rd ses a y rex 2 28 Lighting Considerations garei GG o ERE FD vex GDG Gn Rd UO RUN DDd 2 28 Viewing Angle 55 ener nitet kara suse RAN GR RAD EST HN SY DECR SR DANA RA HER A OS AUU ER OH HAU A 2 29 Remote Display Cablilig aeu Ge iu Gu GO RAD SENE ANE gas Gaio ER CF Gn LD O 2 30 Placing arid Installing the Remote Scale Display iwisiccsicscccconcceredenacnesnewens
146. aGnanaeaonenscecdencsine 2 30 Changing Weighing MOOS uei yR Ry ert Far hu De a Ff EG OS ha RD Ry O 2 33 Set Up amp InstallatiODnk ksosa diinan ana Gn Rat Oda ddd GRON FD CDG UON oia NU ESAE 2 33 SOEP oiriin FH RF EF EF HE RH FU i RH FR HE TYR FF RF FE FFR 2 38 Fmstall ation cei Gos EGG ORUG na DDED CERE IG YU GO y CGG nU O GY 2 35 System PowersUp RECAP cscs cnsnaitewesetedaanatascumensssnsnaniowtetatadaadaraitadeheseaamacteemeduiniahnascntarene 2 39 Chapter 3 Operation and Maintenance eese 371 Scannimg Item Mee Em 3 1 Deaetivating Security Labels uou a caste inte decente usine nil PETEA e ddn TGJ 3 3 Proper Weighing Technique ciii ee stor renun nitus SS TW YC emen Dx MR dE Dort y 3 4 Operational Conbrols iuzisiecsesornus us RH ad RO OU shan AN DONE UL Rd GEO IND C NND DINNER nad 3 5 Operational MOodGSs 21 5 uni ni YO uU UNI REA FL A SR RA y reci DOM ei s e lad 3 5 Power Up Selfcest amp Pre Operati0l aii VOLU een asia RA a 3 5 Operating ModE erts 3 7 Additional FUNCOMS eie REN 3 8 PFOGKAMIMING HYR FR FFRAE RF FR FRS ER FFF FYRFYFYR FF FFR FR FFF UR HF FFR 3 8 DidQmostic Mode iei EET 3 8 Scanner amd Scale Reset ue eiii AG Ep AER EDD an LTT Yn ARF ED Ru Gn Fe 3 9 Scale AdJUSEITelts FF NN HN NF FN HF EE NF Y A Da IE FFR NEN 3 9 OperationalMaimtena iC6 es iian EOFN Ga E E EP FTG Da CR A YR ROF CL dT O ES 3 11 Vertical Scan Window Replacement iiciesciccacsciemcnsccscaccesencdemsnapereestateansadecaecsss
147. able Disable Disable Disable EAN BAJAN B Guard b Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Insertion F 8 Magellan 8300 8400 RS 232 Wincor Keybd RS 232 Nixdorf Single Wedge IBM OEM USB Cable EAN BAJAN G Guard gwae Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Substitution EANFBMAN B Both Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Guards Substitution EAN 8 Stitch Exact pae Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Label Halves EAN B Stitch Unlike pbe Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Label Halves EAN 8 Label ID FF B FF FF EAN 8 2 Digit Sup plemental Label ID id B i RF EAN 8 5 Digit Sup plemental Label ID FF B m BE EAN 8 128 Supple mental Label ID BE 3 i EE f i 1 Very 1 Very 1 Very 1 Very 1 Very 1 Very E N B Decoding Lev Conserva Conserva Conserva Conserva Conserva Conserva tive tive tive tive tive tive EAN 8 Minimum 2 1 2 2 2 2 Reads EAN 8 Minimum Seg 8 8 8 8 8 8 ment Length Price Weight Check Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable In Store Label Mini 2 2 2 2 2 2 mum Reads re ee Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Label EAN Two Label Com mn Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable bined Transmission Product Reference Guide F 9 RS 232 Wincor i Keybd RS232
148. ables transmission of a UPC A number system character This feature MUST be enabled for IBM interfaces for proper function NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code R SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSIO R SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSIO Product Reference Guide 6 163 UPC A Check Character Transmission Enables disables transmission of a UPC A check character To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code HECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSIO 6 164 Magellan 8300 8400 K CHARACTER TRANSMISSIO UPC A Enable Expand UPC A to EAN 13 Enables disables expansion of UPC A labels to EAN JAN 13 To set this feature 1 Scan t
149. ad 52h EO OF SI PAGE UP inner keypad 49h EO 10 DLE PAGE DOWN inner keypad 51h EO 11 DC1 HOME inner keypad 47h EO 12 DC2 LEFT arrow inner keypad 4Bh EO 13 DC3 DOWN arrow inner keypad 50h EO 14 DC4 UP arrow inner keypad 48h EO Product Reference Guide E 3 Table E 3 Scanset 2 Function Key Map i ASCII code Key Scancode 00 NUL ALT right Make EOh 11h 01 SOH ALT right Break EOh FOh 11h 02 STX ALT left Make 11h 03 ETX ALT left Break FOh 11h 04 EOT CTRL left Make 14h 05 ENQ CTRL left Break FOh 14h 06 ACK CTRL right Make EOh 14h 07 BEL CTRL right Break EOh FOh 14h 08 BS BS 66h 09 HT TAB right ODh 0A LF RIGHT arrow inner keypad 74h EO 0B VT TAB left ODh S 0C FF Enter right keypad bAh EO 0D CR CR SAh 0E SO INSERT inner keypad 70h EO OF SI PAGE UP inner keypad Dh EO 10 DLE PAGE DOWN inner keypad Ah EO 11 DC1 HOME inner keypad 6Ch EO 12 DC2 LEFT arrow inner keypad 6Bh EO 13 DC3 DOWN arrow inner keypad 72h EO 14 DC4 UP arrow inner keypad 75h EO 15 NAK F6 OBh 16 SYN F1 05h 17 ETB F2 06h 18 CAN F3 04h 19 EM F4 OCh 1A SUB F5 03h 1B ESC ESC 76h 1C FS F7 63h 1D GS F8 OAh 1E RS F9 Oth 1F US F10 09h E 4 Magellan 8300 8400 Keyboard Model Cross Reference Table E 4 Scanset 3 102 Key Function Key Map
150. age radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des Communications du Canada Product Reference Guide 1 13 Labeling Regulatory reference and safety labeling is shown in Figure 1 4 Figure 1 4 Labeling IEC Laser Warning Model Serial Number I F Connector ID and Regulatory 1 14 Magellan 8300 8400 Agency Compliances Agency Compliances The scanner and scanner scale meets or exceeds the requirements for its device type as set forth by the following agencies and regulations COUNTRY COMPLIANCE COMMENTS Electrical United States UL 60950 State of California Energy Efficiency Standard Canada CAN CSA 60950 Europe TUV EN 60950 Mexico NOM Korea K Mark Argentina IRAM Taiwan BSMI China CCC Japan PSE Australia New Zealand AS NZ 60950 Emisions United States 47CFR Part 15J FCC Class B Canada ICES 0003 Class B Europe EN 55022 Class B Australia New Zealand AS NZS CISPR22 Japan VCCI Class B Taiwan CNS 13438 BSMI Korea Mic Mark Product Reference Guide 1 15 COUNTRY COMPLIANCE COMMENTS ROW CISPR 22 Laser Safety United States CDRH 21CFR Part 1040 CDRH Class lla laser device Europe 60025 1 2007 60825 1 2007 Weights amp Measures United States NIST Handbook 44 Dept of Commerce Canada Measurement Canada Argentina Australia New Zealand National Measurement Institut
151. aker sounds a tone at the lowest value for approx 3 seconds Green and Yellow LEDs flash on and off alternately 7 segment display shows a code 1 to 9 to indicate the failure Consult the Selftest flowchart if you re unsure the unit has passed Selftest Will the scanner rea bar codes reliably NO Go to Poor No Reading flowchart Does the scanner power up ls the Green LED Lit Does the scanner pass Selftest deactivate Go to EAS System flowchart For units using an AC DC adapter verify that 1 AC power cord is connected to a functional AC outlet 2 IEC connectors are firmly connected 3 DC power cord is firmly connected to scanner If your unit is a model which receives Power Off the Terminal POT verify that the I F cable is securely connected at both ends Check these potential problems AC power cord AC DC adaptor AC outlet Ensure the Green LED is Is the enabled via pro Green LED gramming bar codes Lit Call Tech Support NO Go to Selftest flowchart Does the scale weigh correctly Other Problems Call Tech Support NO 1 EAS and scale are product options Go to Scale which may not be present at your flowchart installation MagellanTM 8300 8400 Flowcharts Figure 4 3 Problem Isolation Selftest SELFTEST START Scan the Factory Does the Does the Does the Defaults bar code in dien show dE a sho Section 6 to enable the display sho N 1 de
152. al System number must be included in label data Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor rect Supplemental data is appended to base label Prefix must be an ASCII character E total length including prefix must be 11 Example E0998875012 UPC E with 5 Digit Supplemental System number must be included in label data Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor rect Prefix must be an ASCII character E total length including prefix must be 14 Example E0998875012345 UPC E with Code 128 Supplemental System number must be included in label data Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor rect Supplemental data is appended to base label Prefix must be an ASCII character E total length including prefix must be greater or equal to 15 code 128 Supplemental codes are variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters Characters immediately following base label must be of the form 8100 8101 or 8102 Example E099887508101000951 MagellanTM 8300 8400 EAN 8 Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor rect Prefix must be an ASCII characters FF total length including pre fix must be 10 Example FF00210126 EAN 8 with 2 Digit Supplemental Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor rect Supplemental data is appended to base label
153. all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 001 255 Examples 001 10ms 005 50ms 040 400ms 250 2 500ms 2 5 seconds The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned OD READ BEEP L Product Reference Guide 6 37 Good Read Beep Volume Selects the beeper volume upon a good read beep There are five selectable volumes with each volume increment adding approximately five decibels to the previous level e 0 Lowest Volume e 1 Medium Low Volume e 2 Medium Volume e 3 Highest Volume To set the Good Read Beep Volume 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selected volume bar code from this or the following pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code READ BEEP VOLUME 6 38 Magellan 8300 8400 Indication Features Good Read Beep Volume continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan P VOLUME Product Reference Guide 6 39 BEEP VOLUME Good Read Beep Volume continued Remember to cover any
154. an the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET EAS TIMEOUT below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired EAS Timeout duration The selectable range is 0 255 which is the timeout in 10 millisecond increments Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 000 255 Examples 000 EAS timeout disabled 001 10ms 005 50ms 040 400ms 250 2 500ms 2 5 seconds iE A setting of 0 000 disables this feature NOTE 4 Scan the SWITCH bar code to exit Programming Mode SET EAS TIMEOUT Product Reference Guide 6 53 Interface Related Features Interface Type Specifies the current scanner interface Selections are INTERFACE I F TYPE I F I D NUMBER INTERFACE I F TYPE I F I D NUMBER RS 232 Standard 05 Keyboard Wedge A 25 RS 232 Wincor Nixdorf 12 Keyboard Wedge B 26 RS 232 Single Cable 20 Keyboard Wedge C 27 OEM USB 45 Keyboard Wedge D 28 IBM Port 17 04 Keyboard Wedge E 29 IBM Port 5B 08 Keyboard Wedge F 2A IBM Port 9B 23 Keyboard Wedge G 31 USB Keyboard 35 Keyboard Wedge H 32 Keyboard Wedge 33 NOT USER SELECTABLE Keyboard Wedge J 34 7 segment FRU dis play indicates 0 at Null Interfa
155. andard 2 of 5 Std 2 of 5 Enable Standard 2 of 5 Std 2 of 5 Enable Enables disables the ability of the scanner to decode Standard 2 of 5 labels To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code STANDARD 2 OF 5 DISABLE STANDARD 2 OF 5 ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6 309 Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation Enables disables calculation and verification of an optional Standard 2 of 5 check character can occur When disabled any check characters in a bar code are treated as y If check character calculation is disabled the risk is increased that a misread data characters NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code TANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION DISABLE NDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION ENABLE
156. ange to an incompatible interface ALWAYS make interface selections with the host CAUTION cable DISCONNECTED INTERFACE IBM PORT 5B TYPE 6 62 Magellan 8300 8400 Interface Related Features IBM Port 9B Interface Selection Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type since you can cause damage to the scanner and or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface ALWAYS make interface selections with the host CAUTION cable DISCONNECTED INTERFACE IBM PORT 9B TYPE 6 63 Product Reference Guide USB Keyboard Interface Selection Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type since you can cause damage to the scanner and or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface ALWAYS make interface selections with the host CAUTION cable DISCONNECTED TYPE USB K 6 64 Magellan 8300 8400 Interface Related Features Keyboard Wedge A Interface Selection Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan
157. anging Weighing Modes Your scanner scale has been programmed for weighing in either pounds or kilograms depending upon the initial operating environment that was specified when you ordered your scanner scale If you need to change from pounds to kilograms or vice versa call technical support You can verify that the scale is set correctly for your country s requirements by observing that the Remote Scale Display shows the appropriate mea surement symbol Ib or kg when the power up Selftest is completed LEGAL NOTE Any time the scale weighing mode is changed the scale must be re calibrated before commercial use Set Up amp Installation These setup and installation procedures assume that you have already pre pared your checkstand to receive the scanner or scanner scale If you have not already made the counter cutout and routed power and interface cables do so now as described in the previous instructions If your check stand has been prepared proceed as follows Set up 1 Place the scanner on the checkstand next to the counter cutout 2 Make all connections to peripheral devices such as the Remote Scale Display see Figure 2 23 and if your installation includes an EAS system refer to that manufacturer s instructions for connection and start up procedures 3 Route the cables up through the cutout and connect the scanner and scale interface cable s EAS cable and Remote Scale Display cable optional to the scanner Some
158. at rep resent the desired delay The selectable range is 0 100 which is the delay in 10 millisecond increments Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 000 100 Examples 001 10ms 005 50ms 040 400ms 100 1 000ms 1 second 4 The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned SET RS 232 INTERCHARACTER DELAY Product Reference Guide 6 107 RS 232 Software Flow Control Enables disables RS 232 Flow Control using XON XOFF characters This item will be ignored when the feature RS 232 NAK Character is enabled NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code 232 SOFTWARE FLOW CONTROL S 232 SOFTWARE FLOW CONTROL ENABL 6 108 Magellan 8300 8400 RS 232 Features RS 232 Host Echo NOTE When enabled this feature passes all data through the scanner to the host as it comes in This feature is used for applications where daisy chaining of RS
159. at the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan E F C 8 Magellan 8300 8400 Appendix D Host Commands Accepting Commands from an RS 232 Scanner Host The scanner responds to the following RS 232 commands COMMAND ASCII HEX COMMENT Enable Scanner E 0x45 Disable Scanner D 0x44 Reset Scanner R 0x52 Not On File Indication F 0x46 Long series of beeps Beep Good Read Tone B 0x42 Beeps if Good Read Beep is enabled Force Good Read Tone 0x01 Beeps regardless of beep setting Bel 0x07 Force Good Read Tone Identification request i 0x69 Returns long response Health request h 0x68 Returns long response Status request S 0x73 Returns long response a Call Tech Support for information If one of the above commands is received the scanner will perform the steps indicated for the command Host commands for other interfaces is also available Contact Tech Support for more details Product Reference Guide D 1 NOTES Magellan 8300 8400 Appendix E Keyboard Function Key Mappings Keyboard Model Cross Reference Table E 2 summarizes the keyboard models their defined protocol scancode set and some unique features The remaining tables in this chapter provide the function key maps associated with each of the scancode sets Product Reference Guide E 1 Table E 1 Keyboard Model Cross Reference Func Trans Scancode Key vap
160. ate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET MSI PLESSEY LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6 349 MSI Plessey Length Control This feature specifies whether variable length or fixed length decoding will be set for MSI Plessey To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming seguence by scanning the SWITCH bar code i You must now set the features MSI Plessey Length 1 and MSI Plessey Length 2 MSI PLESSEY LENGTH CONTROL VARIABLE LENGTH NOTE MSI PLESSEY LENGTH CONTROL FIXED LENGTH
161. ay is designed so that single display heads can be stacked to form a dual display as shown in Figure 2 21a in order to address the specific viewing needs of both the customer and the cashier Factors to consider when installing this device are e Lighting Considerations e Viewing Angle e Remote Display Cabling Lighting Considerations The display s will be easily readable unless placed in direct sunlight or other very strong light sources Light interference will not be a factor in most installations For best viewing the display head s can each be rotated up to 180 around the post and or tilted 15 backward or forward 2 28 Magellan 8300 8400 Remote Scale Display Placement Installation Viewing Angle The optimum display angle is directly facing the viewer Tilt and rotatioin adjustments can be made as shown in Figure 2 21b To ensure that dis plays are easily readable for customers cashiers of average height display heads should be between 48 to 60 122 to 152 cm from the floor Check with local Weights and Measures authorities regarding proper posi tioning of scale displays used in retail trade NOTE Figure 2 21 Modular Adjustable Remote Scale Display G fal o Upward or Dual Display Downward Tilt Heads Rotation Single Display Head Rotation 2 29 Product Reference Guide Remote Display Cabling Your installation should also
162. ay will alternately display and until the scale is ready to proceed 9 If the calibration was successful the speaker sounds a single tone the Scale Status LED begins blinking again and End appears in the Remote Display 10 If the calibration was not successful the speaker will sound five tones indicating a scale failure and the Scale Status LED will blink twice strobe fast blinks and then continually repeat this sequence until reset Remove all weight from the Weigh Platter and repeat the procedure starting with step 7 11 Press the Zero Push Button again to permanently store the calibra tion data and exit Calibration Mode You have completed the cali bration of the scanner scale The unit s calibration must now be verified as required by state and or local weights and measures regu lations The verification procedure must be performed to assure that a scale will pass Weights and Measures requirements before it is placed into commercial retail service You have completed the scale calibration procedure You must now con tinue with the calibration verification tests to complete the scale s calibra tion If you are weighing in pounds continue with the following procedures to verify that the scale was successfully calibrated and that it weighs properly If you are weighing in kilograms turn to the instructions titled Calibration Verification Kilograms later in this chapter 5 6 Magellan
163. b 62 ETX 03 23 C 43 C 63 EOT 04 24 D 44 d 64 ENQ 05 96 25 E 45 e 65 ACK 06 amp 26 F 46 f 66 BEL 07 27 G 47 g 67 BS 08 28 H 48 h 68 HT 09 29 49 i 69 LF 0A T 2A J 4A j 6A VT 0B 2B K 4B k 6B FF 0C 2C L 4C 6C CR 0D 2D M 4D m 6D SO 0E n 2E N 4E n 6E SI OF 2F O 4F 0 6F DLE 10 0 30 P 50 p 70 DC1 11 1 31 Q 51 q 71 DC2 12 2 32 R 52 f 72 DC3 13 3 33 S 53 S 73 DC4 14 4 34 T 54 t 74 NAK 15 5 35 U 55 u 75 SYN 16 6 36 V 56 V 76 ETB 17 7 37 Ww 57 w 77 CAN 18 8 38 X 58 X 78 EM 19 9 39 Y 59 y 79 SUB 1A 3A Z 5A z 7A ESC 1B 3B 5B 7B FS 1C lt 3C 5C 7C Gs 1D 3D 5D 7D RS 1E gt 3E 5E 7E US 1F 3F _ 5F DEL YF Australia Datalogic Scanning Pty Ltd Telephone 61 2 9870 3200 australia scanning datalogic com France and Benelux Datalogic Scanning SAS Telephone 33 01 64 86 71 00 france scanning datalogic com Germany Datalogic Scanning GmbH Telephone 49 0 61 51 93 58 0 germany scanning datalogic com India Datalogic Scanning India Telephone 91 22 64504739 india scanning datalogic com Italy Datalogic Scanning SpA Telephone 39 0 39 62903 1 italy sscanning datalogic com Japan Datalogic Scanning KK Telephone 81 0 3 3491 6761 japan scanning datalogic com Latin America Datalogic Scanning Inc Telephone 305 742 2206 latinamerica scanning datalogic com Singapore Datalogic Scanning Singapore PTE LTD Telephone 65 6435 131
164. bar code 2 Scan the bar code below or from the following page representing the desired option You ll need to cover any unused bar codes and facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code TART STOP CHARACT ODABAR START STOP CHARACTER ABCD A 6 322 Magellan 8300 8400 Codabar Enable Codabar Start Stop Character Set continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan AR START STOP CHARACTER abcd tn e Product Reference Guide 6 323 TART STOP CHAR R abcd abcd Codabar Start Stop Character Match Enables disables the requirement that start and stop characters match To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code R START STOP CHARACTER MATCH R START STOP CHARACTER MA
165. bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code Length 1 and or MSI Plessey Length 2 must be properly configured for i MSI Plessey Stitching operates using fixed lengths ONLY MSI Plessey stitching to work NOTE MSI PLESSEY STITCHING DISABLE MSI PLESSEY STITCHING ENABLE 6 354 Magellan 8300 8400 MSI Plessey Enable MSI Plessey Minimum Reads Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an MSI Plessey label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming seguence by scanning the SWITCH bar code PLESSEY MINIMUM R PLESSEY MINIMUM R Product Reference Guide 6 355 MSI Plessey Minimum Reads continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to sca
166. bel ID to be added to bar code data when GTIN conversion is enabled and 5 digit supplemental addon bar code labels are converted The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET GTIN 5 DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their correspond ing Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF for each of the two characters Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET GTIN 5 DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID 6 252 Magellan 8300 8400 GTIN Enable GTIN Code 128 Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when GT
167. bel Slicing Control Enables disables the slicing of IBM 46XX host transmission data into multiple pieces when a label is longer than the length specified by IBM Maximum Label Slice Length Options are e Disable Label Slicing Send data to host in one piece e Enable Label Slicing Slice the host data into multiple pieces when necessary To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code IBM LABEL SLICING CONTROL DISABLE LABEL SLICING EL SLICING CONTROL ENABLE LABEL Product Reference Guide 6 93 IBM Maximum Label Slice Length Specifies the maximum allowable length of host transmit data in each sliced frame 7 This setting only applies when IBM Label Slicing Control is enabled NOTE Scan the SWITCH bar code Scan the bar code below SET IBM MAXIMUM LABEL SLICE LENGTH You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired slice length The s
168. ble Codabar Start Stop Character Transmis Disable Enable Disable Disable Disable Disable sion Codabar Start Stop abcd abcd abcd abcd abcd abcd abcd abcd abcd abcd abcd abcd Character Set Codabar Start Stop piii Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Character Match Godabar Cheuk Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Character Calculation Codabar Check Character Transmis Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable sion Codabar Label ID N Codabar Require Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Quiet Zones Codabar Length Con Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable trol Codabar Length 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 Codabar Length 2 50 50 50 50 50 50 Codabar Correlation Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Codabar Stitching Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Minimum 1 1 1 1 1 1 Code 93 Enable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Code 93 Label ID amp L amp amp Code 93 Length Con irel Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Product Reference Guide F 15 RS 232 Wincor Keybd RS 232 Nixdorf Single Wedge IBM OEM USB Cable Code 93 Length 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Code 93 Length 2 50 50 50 50 50 50 Code 93 Correlation Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Code 93 Stitching Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Code 93 Minimum R
169. by scanning the SWITCH bar code BLE RS 232 USE A 6 140 Magellan 8300 8400 E CABLE RS 232 USE ACK NA Single Cable RS 232 Options Single Cable RS 232 Use STX Enables disables the ability of the scanner to use STX To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code CABLE RS 232 USE ABLE RS 232 USE Product Reference Guide 6 141 Set Single Cable RS 232 STX Character This feature selects the STX character To specify the STX Character Ls 2 Scan the SWITCH bar code Scan the bar code SET SINGLE CABLE RS 232 STX CHARAC TER below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Scan the appropriate characters digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the decimal designation for the desired character A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding decimal values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning decimal digits for each
170. cale Zero Push Button located at the bottom of the control panel Magellan 8300 8400 Physical Parameters Warm Up Time There are two pertinent warm up times that apply to the scanner or scan ner scale The two warm up periods can be performed concurrently thereby reducing the total required warm up time to 60 minutes Thermal Equilibrium When the unit is moved from a cooler temperature such as a storage area to a warmer environment such as a checkstand location 60 minutes must be allowed to acclimate the unit to ambient conditions prior to cali bration or operation Power up Once installed and powered up a warm up time of 15 minutes must be allowed before calibrating or performing weighing operations User Configurable Warm up The user may configure the unit for a pre programmed warm up time that is activated every time the scanner is powered up During this time the scale is viewed by the POS terminal as off line Contact Technical Support to learn more about this advanced pro grammable feature Product Reference Guide 1 9 Figure 1 3 Environmental Specifications 40 lisa F 10 d F Temperature 10 to 40 C 50 to 104 F Dust Proof Optics Cavity IP5X Illumination Artificial Light Sunlight 0 450 Foot candles 0 8 000 Foot candles A 4 842 LUX 86 080 LUX adip A Humidity NA D Hot Wet 40 C 95 RH AM i Proof Hot Dry 40 C 15 RH Datalogic MS 0
171. can the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code Product Reference Guide 6 301 SET 2 of 5 LABEL ID I 2 of 5 Length Control This feature specifies whether variable length or fixed length decoding will be set for I 2 of 5 To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code iz You must now set the features 2 of 5 Length 1 and 2 of 5 Length 2 I 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL VARIABLE LENGTH NOTE I 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL FIXED LENGTH 6 302 Magellan 8300 8400
172. ce by scanning the SWITCH bar code R CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION R CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION 6 326 Magellan 8300 8400 Codabar Enable Codabar Label ID This feature specifies a Codabar label ID to e added to bar code data The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET CODABAR LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET CODABAR LABEL ID
173. ce start up accompa nied by trill beep for approx 2 seconds a To access a scanner s interface identification number place the scanner in Scanner Diagnostic Mode and view the 7 segment FRU display reference Chapter 2 Scanner Diagnostic Mode for more information 6 54 Magellan 8300 8400 Interface Related Features Interface Type continued A new scanner may have been shipped from the factory with a Null Interface no interface type selected to ensure system compatibility at installation In this case the correct Interface Type programming bar code must be scanned first before the scanner can be used with a POS system If the scanner s interface type must be changed always be sure that interface configuration is the FIRST item scanned during a programming session Selecting an interface type resets ALL other configuration items to the fac tory default for that interface type To select the desired interface Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type since you can cause damage to the scanner and or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED CAUTION When an interface is selected the scanner loads the factory configuration for that interface as the selection is made erasing any and all custom config uration that may have previously been done 1 Disconnect current interface cable s
174. character Delay lt i evsoseu iet ehausesisSR n rn ian re e D o xR SEX SEDE 6 159 Symbology Programming seem in dco SER PAG UR NEA Xa dede LOU Rad SER RENE RAN OD MINIM FN 6 160 COUPON COMENG er www 6 160 UPC A Enable ieir By i Gn WYR Yn yy YW Ea O FF ta ER RF Ry aoa 6 162 UPC A Number System Character TransmissSiOn cies terunt entente Runner niii 6 163 UPC A Check Character Transimisslol een st ensiesnessatc vett bubtipses d eme SERERE ERAI Mta 6 164 Expand UPC A to BAN 13 4 cn tne E ER CG ENNIU M NB naman RUDD FD 6 165 UPC A Label ID annuw siesetakithsnsa GR a Ga ERE res ker utate em cage peas ree a FER GT ga uEER 6 166 UPC A 2 Digit Supplemental Label ID eii aw un in WY DYER metere cnr k at GE FR penta 6 167 UPC A 5 Digit Supplemental Label ID 11 ruri atre NNOL Oad AUR heu SR Rr Pn iiis 6 168 UPC A 128 Supplemental Label ID tetuer eoe de herpes hee eor ene te sie r aE 6 169 UPC A MINIMUM BRedds sssisusscccbsusudo ore HR IRI a Ioh ME IRE EN REN ADU DE REED DRM ERRARE 6 170 UPC E Enable somis 5 2 ae iii Good da Tage al ree O id RR dB EI MR Y FR SF EN PI RET 6 172 UPC E Number System Character TramnsmissiOll ciii GU EE ERIRORS RUNS qu ORU NEUE FO 6 173 UPC E Check Character TranSMiSSIOM 2 eani ieu ad tht GY DRO ceu RODER dA RE DON GR YD OD saat 6 174 Expand UPC E to UPC A scio ioter a Y YG Y N E GY ADY Fd RFC ES ees 6 175 Expand UPE ECO EANSES ca ue ei aU LE niU CT Ew A TY N renta ST Clod da THY 6 176 UPC E Label ID ws
175. code 2 Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming seguence by scanning the SWITCH bar code DataBar Omnidirectional MINIMUM DataBar Omnidirectional MINIMUM Product Reference Guide 6 257 DataBar Omnidirectional Minimum Reads contin ued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan DataBar Omnidirectional MINIMUM READ DataBar Omnidirectional MINIMUM 6 258 Magellan 8300 8400 DataBar Expanded Enable DataBar Expanded Enable Enables disables the ability of the scanner to decode DataBar Expanded labels This value added feature is a factory programmed option Contact your dealer for information about upgrading your system to include this advanced capability NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming seguence by scannin
176. code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code Length 1 and or Standard 2 of 5 Length 2 must be properly configured for Stitching to work TCHING DISABLE i Standard 2 of 5 Stitching operates using fixed lengths ONLY Standard 2 of 5 NOTE I 2 OF 5 STITCHING ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6 317 Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Standard 2 of 5 label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming seguence by scanning the SWITCH bar DARD 2 of 5 MINIMUM code MINIM 6 318 MagellanTM 8300 8400 Standard 2 of 5 Std 2 of 5 Enable Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 5 MINIM
177. ct Tech Support Is the Use the programming bar unit configured codes in Section 6 to for a Remote enable operation using a Display Remote Display 9 Verify that the Remote Display cable is securely attached to the external Remote Display port and reset the scanner Re connect using a known good Remote Replace the Display Reset the Remote Display scanner and retest Call Tech Support Product Reference Guide 4 13 Figure 4 8 Problem Isolation EAS System NO EAS DEACTIVATION Before proceeding verify the EAS START Antenna and associated equipment have been correctly installed ref Chapter 2 Ensure operator has been trained in proper EAS system use ref Chapter 3 Check all EAS Verify programmable ecx a gt parameters using the Does the t bstituti cable connections information and programming EAS Antenna UO FAS cable bar codes provided in Section deactivate and or other EAS 6 Check EAS options and labels equipment other configurable features If possible retest the Does the EAS Antenna deactivate Does the labels YES EAS Antenna a deactivate labels Call Tech Support 4 14 Magellan 8300 8400 Chapter 5 Calibration A number of situations require the scale to be calibrated They are e at initial installation of the scanner scale e if the scale cannot be re zeroed e if you change the weight measure from pounds to kilograms or vice versa e if diagnostics indicate a ca
178. d Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan T ADD ONS MINIMUM R 6 244 Magellan 8300 8400 Other UPC EAN Options 5 Digit Add ons Minimum Reads Specifies the minimum number of times a 5 digit addon must be read before it is marked as valid and then combined with a base label To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar T ADD ONS MINIMUM code T ADD ONS MINIMUM R Product Reference Guide 6 245 5 Digit Add ons Minimum Reads continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan ADD ONS MINIMUM T ADD ONS MINIMUM R 6 246 Magellan 8300 8400 Other UPC EAN Options Code 128 Add ons Minimum Reads Specifies the minimum number of times a Code 128 addon must be read before it is marked as valid and then combined with a base label To set this feature 1 Scan the
179. d Device The scanner can also accept programming via its auxilliary port using a handheld scanning device Eligible handheld devices must have the ability to transmit Code 128 function codes such as the programming bar codes presented in this manual Datalogic models QuickScan 1000 and QuickScan 6000 support this functionality Handheld data format requirements baud rate parity etc are presented in Appendix G of this manual Additionally the programmable feature Auxiliary Port Mode must be set to External Handheld Input to allow operation Magellan 8300 8400 Programming Overview What Is Programming Mode Programming Mode is a state in which the scanner must be placed in order to accept commands via programming bar code labels When pro gramming using the bar code labels in this manual the scanner is typically placed in Programming Mode by scanning the SWITCH label While in the Programming Mode the scanner only recognizes ONLY the special programming bar codes contained in this programming guide See Appendix A for information about scanner indications while in Program ming Mode Entering and Exiting Programming Mode Use the bar code label below to enter and exit switch into and out of Programming Mode SWITCH LABEL Product Reference Guide 6 5 Programming Session A typical programming session is conducted as follows l Scan the SWITCH bar code to place the scanner in Programmi
180. data 7 The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature L 2 Scan the SWITCH bar code Scan the bar code SET EAN 13 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID DISABLE below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FE Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET EAN 13 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID DISABLE 6 190 Magellan 8300 8400 EAN 13 Enable EAN 13 Minimum Reads Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an EAN 13 label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or o
181. dels 8302 8304 8402 8404 Medium Shelf Optional Leveling Feet Minimum Cutout Dimensions Max Radius 0 25 0 635cm 4x a A a ferwi Models 8302 8304 8402 8404 Medium Shelf Supports 4 08 103 6mm Bl ML i Shelf Ea C ji Support Rails n Li i it Le Liquid v Drainage t Support Rails Drainage Figure 2 11 Medium Shelf Models 8302 8304 8402 8404 Scanner Reference Dimensions Models 8302 8304 8402 8404 Medium Shelf Scanner Reference Dimensions 11 5 29 21cm 0 1cm 4 59 11 7cm n 7 5 5 19 19 05cm 13 2cm 1 D 4 08 10 36cm 0 15cm 1 15 71 39 9cm 0 15cm 2 16 MagellanTM 8300 8400 Counter Cutout Figure 2 12 Medium Flanged Models 8302 8304 8402 8404 Cutout Dimensions Models 8302 8304 8402 8404 Medium Flanged Minimum Cutout Dimensions Max Radius 0 25 0 635cm 4x 0 75 W a z 45 7cm Ny 16 625 7 gt 42 23em 7 11 625 29 53cm Center Line Rail If leveling feet are needed use the placement shown here represented with plus signs Models 8302 8304 8402 8404 Medium Flanged Supports 0 75 gt lt a 1 9cm iom A Liquid ma 4 0 10 2 cm Drainage a 9 16 625 Liquid 42 23cm
182. ds EA TEE inda GI Ed RR RY 6 37 Good Read Beep Volume eie I ia see GEO DU Dana GEY pened EAGER 6 38 Good Read When to Indicate i sitiunt a GO GL GO da GRO RG E da DDR Gn 6 41 ScaleFeattirG6Su asen Ge O O GOR i a DR o FC GC GA CR Rd odd i i DC Yo 6 43 We 6 43 Scala Enforced Zero ROUEN 2 3 oce roo rav ne eR CRB Uo Gan ylw DO tuse Renier DE DG nucis RE P ERU ER ER 6 44 Scale Inte mace TYPE i35 ciencia EPIO ERRAIRSRIUSI EN DORSUDIPI ROE dU ADNOD quU unn D DIM RUM EAQUE 6 47 Scale Calibration MotificatlOn 524 5 GR Gn O tert DR hse pent ID bid Marone On COEG dU LOLO DR ano 6 49 Scale Intercharacter Delay eu Ceiau ues isses pUM FERNER E NR ERE ARE 6 50 Remote Display Enable Disable 22 32 mco torte enisi tnnt su sita Gina Nld Gwn etienne si seii as 6 51 EAS Features EE 6 52 EAS Active State ccc cctcasc tac cicdeddaapvatanssatamaeradelenianidaaseeut nas iaaagaparecadedsagansammberasiananaes 6 52 cx pe EEUU 6 53 Interface Related Features cui GaG UU utar n tmd MM MEER EAM aE 6 54 Interface Typ aissessstsscestetetitasecestestchaa tec ER GRIO pP end TA RY RI i AR tance 6 54 Product Reference Guide iii Number of Host Transmission BUffers siatssessscccuswsiixacrcccceasmmanaataessacasoadianseeetataamanaienes 6 76 AIM ID OFER FR Y EFE FFR FFRYNT FFRIO TR FF RR HE 6 77 Label ID Control isr ODL O ea GOST DEIO Ud a EG RT bn DDO ddid FE 6 79 Global PROT de ITE 6 82 Global SUFI Acer GREF O a GR ant a OD YR y EG O Ga CS gf RT 6 84 e geil
183. ds only the bar code you intend to scan HOST ACKNOWLE RS 232 ACK NAK LABEL amp HOST 6 120 Magellan 8300 8400 RS 232 Features RS 232 ACK Character This feature specifies which ASCII character will be used as an ACK char 7 NOTE acter DO NOT set this feature to use previously defined characters such as XON XOFF or host commands as this will conflict with normal operation of these characters 8 bit data is not recognized when the feature RS 232 Number of Data Bits is set to 7 data bits To specify the RS 232 ACK Character im 2 Scan the SWITCH bar code Scan the bar code SET RS 232 ACK CHARACTER below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the hex designation for the desired character A table contain ing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for the desired character For example if ASCII A were the desired ACK character you would scan the digits 4 then 1 the ASCII corre sponding hex value The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits characters have been scanned
184. e Brazil INMETRO EC Countries Type Approval Cert Mexico NOM Puerto Rico Same as USA Singapore Spring Singapore ROW OIML R76 Russia Contact Datalogic Product Marketing at 541 683 5700 or your Data logic representative for a complete listing of approvals for other countries 1 16 Magellan 8300 8400 Bar Codes Supported Bar Codes Supported The scanner can read decode the following bar code types symbologies Retail Codes Industrial Codes UPC Versions A amp E with full expansion E to A plus A and E to 13 capability UPC Supplementals and Add ons Bookland amp Coupon code UPC two character supplemental encodation and UPC five charac ter supplemental encodation and supplemental C128 with support for conditional add ons DataBar Omnidirectional formerly RSS 14 DataBar Expanded formerly RSS Expanded maximum characters 74 numeric or 41 alpha DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional formerly RSS 14 Stacked EAN 8 amp 13 with full expansion 8 to 13 JAN 8 amp 13 with full expansion 8 to 13 UCC EAN 128 Italian Pharmacode Code 39 Support GTIN Code 39 Code 39 full ASCII Code 128 including conversion to Code 39 Code 93 Interleaved 2 of 5 I 2 of 5 Standard 2 of 5 Codabar MSI Plessey Product Reference Guide 1 17 Dual Bar Codes for Japan 2 label read The following qualifications apply to Dual Bar Codes for Japan Two label combin
185. e Flow Control RS 232 Host Echo Disable Disable RS 232 Host Echo 10ms 10ms Quiet Interval RS 232 Ignore Host Do not Do not Do not Do not Do not Do not Commands ignore ignore ignore ignore ignore ignore Normal Normal PETE RS 232 RS 232 RS 232 TTL Invert No invert No invert RS 232 ICL DC1 Character Delay Disable Disable Enable RS 232 Team POS ICL Scale Disable Disable RS 232 Beep on ASCII BEL Disable Disable PEE ete UU Disable Disable Disable Weigh on BD O No Enable Enable Enable on File MagellanTM 8300 8400 RS 232 Wincor Nixdorf RS 232 Single Cable Keybd Wedge IBM OEM USB RS 232 ACK NAK Enable Disable Disable RS 232 ACK Charac ter ACK ACK RS 232 NAK Charac ter NAK NAK RS 232 Retry on ACK NAK Timeout Enable Enable RS 232 ACK NAK Timeout Value 200ms 200ms RS 232 ACK NAK Retry Count 3 resets 3 resets RS 232 ACK NAK Error Handling Ignore errors Ignore errors Single Cable RS 232 Scanner Only Proto col Scanner scale Single Cable RS 232 Stale Weight Timeout 330 msec Single Cable RS 232 Scale Transmit Weight Digits Transmit as 4 digits Single Cable Manu facturer Extensions Disable Single Cable Paces etter Plus Enable Disable Single Cable RS 232 RTS CTS Selection Option 5 Product Reference Guide
186. e 4 1 7 Segment LED Display Vertical Window Seven Segment Display Horizontal Product Reference Guide 4 5 Scale Error Reporting Scale diagnostics uses the Remote Scale Display and the Zero Status lamp to communicate specific scale failures The following chart shows the Remote Display messages the Scale Status lamp indication the problem that the scale is experiencing and what action should be taken When troubleshooting always remember to check all cable connections first before proceeding with other problem isolation steps Remote Scale Status Display Lamp Flash pause 1 blink E1 long pause repeat sequence Flash pause 2 E 2 blinks long pause repeat sequence Flash pause 3 E93 blinks long pause repeat sequence Flash pause 4 E 4 blinks long pause repeat sequence Flash pause 5 E 5 blinks long pause repeat sequence Problem Description Too much motion at power up Calibration lost Scale communication lost Internal scanner scale prob lem Scale module failure Internal software fault Other Scale Reporting Action Required Check for stable installation Scale may require calibration Call technical support personnel Re calibrate restart recertify if required Call technical support personnel report error Call technical support personnel report error Call technical support personnel report error 4 6 Magellan 8300
187. e EU 6 86 TBNIPOSEUeS s obtesis soot oti adum Res ct eund dea sun Md ATI SUED RUN KT ad UNA RU AGRIS Lud bi Gdut aqu OR 6 88 IBM Interface Options gaei Ow e SERO ERES A S di NI RENS 6 88 TBM Nurmber ot FOSEROSQLS a ameu uetus reali Gua aac EWE A HF Y itae uia cla Putin a UE UE 6 89 IBM Scale AdGIl ess iri uno a HOH RP Yy RF GRH Da FR KEEN id ontacs DIES 6 90 IBM Transmit Fabelsiin Code 39 FOPmaE siiis cei dioeue ER GG Y AE nas ri sap OR Or Ri RE RAS anes 6 92 IBM Label Slicing Control 2 32 55 decent YA GL Cn RO OFN addo nod YC O 6 93 IBM Maximum Label Slice Eerngtli 5 EGG OG Tn if GL aa 6 94 OEM USB Scanner Device Typ amp 2 5 1 iA GAU wUd ada DAR ORG ease YY GR FO a nd 6 95 RS 232 Features e Eye Ty Yad OE HU Y Sy nin a din a RY Cyfyng i Y Ge Tf o 6 96 RS 232 Ba d Rate ooi ec i aud ddid GE YDA A Ra A A t MI IK IQ Rd RR GE OR anes EI ROGUE FF GE UE 6 96 RS 232 N mber OF Data Bits siirsin EE Ys bL WD ER Ry FN TG WE UDD idR UM DUREE 6 100 RS 232 Number of Stop BltS aain ie DOE a DENODD 6 101 RS 232 PANTY EE HEH FFR NN YF FFYN YW EF HER FFR Y RF FF EY YN DC FRYN NHU HYFRYD 6 102 RS 232 Hardware Controll enni Eoo INFE UNDE SD dan Gn RE ddn OU NOG Mean Y 6 104 RS 232 Intercharacter Delay sicing eini niidid ri Mudpegacidadacecateacntate 6 107 RS 232 Software Flow Control aes NES uo e dod GOF yu ad dn ERE 6 108 RS 232 HOSE ECHO re 6 109 RS 232 Host Echo Quiet Interval 55 5 5 harto nadaanan aar AN YE ERR R HIR Rd RR 6 110 R5 232 Ignore H
188. e and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 000 249 If this configuration item is set to 0 000 there is no general length limit imposed on data being transmitted to the host NOTE 4 The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned SET MAXIMUM HOST TRANSMITTED MESSAGE LENGTH Product Reference Guide 6 75 Number of Host Transmission Buffers Specifies the number of host transmission s that may be buffered By buffering data from a bar code the scanner can continue to read a new bar code while the old one is being transmitted to the host Selecting BUF FERS 1 means that the first bar code must be transmitted before a new one can be read A selection of BUFFERS 2 means that a new bar code can be read while data from the first bar code is transmitted When the feature Good Read Beep Control is enabled the scanner will beep when the data is placed in a transmission buffer When a DISABLE SCANNER command is received from the host the scanner will continue to transmit all data that is buffered To select the Number of Host Transmission Buffers 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan bar code below representing the desired setting You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan
189. e digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired label length A setting of 000 will ignore this length only one fixed length otherwise the selectable range for this option is 004 to 016 Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 004 016 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code MSI PLESSEY LENGT 6 352 Magellan 8300 8400 MSI Plessey Enable MSI Plessey Correlation This feature enables disables character correlation for MSI Plessey To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code ESSEY CORRELATION Y CORRELATION Product Reference Guide 6 353 MSI Plessey Stitching Enables disables stitching for MSI Plessey labels When parts of an MSI Plessey bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner s software and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the
190. e it is accepted as a good read To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar E MINIMUM REA code Product Reference Guide 6 181 UPC E MINIMUM R UPC E Minimum Reads continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan UPC E MINIMUM READS 3 E MINIMUM READ 6 182 Magellan 8300 8400 EAN 13 Enable EAN 13 Enable Enables disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN JAN 13 labels To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code EAN 13 DISABLE EAN 13 ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6 183 EAN 13 First Character Transmission Enables disables transmission of EAN JAN 13 first character To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan e
191. e scanner s software and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code CODE 39 STITCHING DISABLE CODE 39 STITCHING ENABLE 6 278 Magellan 8300 8400 Code 39 Enable Code 39 Minimum Reads Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Code 39 label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming seguence by scanning the SWITCH bar CODE 3 DS 1 9 MINIMUM REA code CODE 39 Product Reference Guide 6 279 DS 2 MINIMUM REA Code 39 Minimum Reads continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan C
192. e you can cause damage to the scanner and or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface ALWAYS make interface selections with the host CAUTION cable DISCONNECTED Single cable installations reguire connection at the POS Terminal host port The Scale Host port connection is not used for this interface NOTE TYPE O INTERFACE EM USB 6 60 Magellan 8300 8400 Interface Related Features IBM Port 17 Interface Selection Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type since you can cause damage to the scanner and or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface ALWAYS make interface selections with the host CAUTION cable DISCONNECTED Single cable installations require connection at the POS Terminal host port The Scale Host port connection is not used for this interface NOTE IBM PORT 17 INTERFACE TYPE 6 61 Product Reference Guide IBM Port 5B Interface Selection Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type since you can cause damage to the scanner and or POS terminal by attempting to ch
193. eads MSI Plessey Enable Disable Disable Disable Disable MSI Plessey Check Character Sonera Enable Enable Enable Enable MSI Plessey Number 1 check 1 check 1 check 1 check of Check Characters char char char char MSI Plessey Check Character Transmis Enable Enable Enable Enable sion MSI Plessey Label ID O 9 9 MSI Plessey Length Variable Variable Variable Variable Control MSI Plessey Length 1 MSI Plessey Length 2 16 16 16 16 MSI Plessey Correla Disable Disable Disable Disable tion MSI Plessey Stitch ing Disable Disable Disable Disable MSI Plessey Mini mum Reads F 16 Magellan 8300 8400 Appendix G Handheld Data Format Requirements This appendix provides application notes to describe the general format of data that can be accepted by the scanner through the auxilliary port as transmitted from a handheld scanner Handheld Data Format Requirements General 9600 bps 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity RTS is used to bracket the data received from the handheld RTS must be asserted high during data transmission and de asserted after label transmission is complete No other flow control mecha nisms are required or supported The de assertion of the RTS signal must occur no later than 50 milliseconds from the complete trans mission of the last character of the transmitted data The time between character transmission can be
194. ected by the host This feature is also applicable to single cable RS 232 P ON NOT ON FILE D P ON NOT ON FILE 6 118 Magellan 8300 8400 RS 232 Features RS 232 ACK NAK Enable This enables disables the ability of the scanner to support the RS 232 ACK NAK protocol When configured the scanner and or host sends an ACK when it receives data properly and sends NAK when the data is in error Selections for this option are e Disable Label Transmission the scanner expects an ACK NAK response from the host when a label is sent Host Acknowledgement Enabled for Host Commands the scan ner will respond with ACK NAK when the host sends a command e Label amp Host Enabled for both Label Transmission amp Host Commands To select the option for RS 232 ACK NAK Enable 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the desired option from bar codes below and on the following page You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the fac ing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code K NAK Product Reference Guide 6 119 K NAK LABEL TRANS RS 232 ACK NAK Enable continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner rea
195. ed is not a valid configuration NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code below representing the desired Data Bit setting You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming seguence by scanning the SWITCH bar code 232 NUMBER OF DATA BITS 6 100 MagellanTM 8300 8400 MBER OF D RS 232 Features RS 232 Number of Stop Bits Specifies number of stop bits required for sending and receiving data 8 data bits with 2 stop bits and parity enabled is not a valid configuration NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code below representing the desired Stop Bit setting You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code S 232 NUMBER OF STOP B Product Reference Guide 6 101 MBER OF STO RS 232 Parity Specifies parity required for sending and receiving data 8 data bits with 2 stop bits and parity enabled is not a valid configuration NOTE Options for this setting are e RS 232 PARITY NONE e RS 232 PARITY
196. ed label length A setting of 000 will ignore this length only one fixed length otherwise the selectable range for this option is 001 to 074 Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 001 074 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code DataBar Expanded LE ET 6 264 Magellan 8300 8400 DataBar Expanded Enable DataBar Expanded Minimum Reads Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an DataBar Expanded label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming seguence by scanning the SWITCH bar code DataBar Expanded MINIM DataBar Expanded MINIMUM Product Reference Guide 6 265 DataBar Expanded Minimum Reads continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan ataBar Expanded MIN ataBar Expanded MIN 6 266 Magellan 8300 8400 Code 39 Enable Code
197. ed transmission Two label global midamble see Chapter 6 Programming for more details NOTE Two label flag is set by selecting any 4 digits as the flag 1 18 Magellan 8300 8400 Chapter 2 Site Preparation and Installation This chapter provides a reference for preparing most checkstands to receive the scanner or scanner scale Included are physical parameters and instructions for checkstand preparation power and ventilation consider ations cable routing information and unit installation Site Preparation lists all procedures necessary to prepare the checkstand The instructions that follow titled Checkstand Preparation detail steps for the scanner only and scanner scale variations that are available shown in Figure 2 1 to facilitate easy installation into almost any checkstand application around the world Once the procedures in this chapter are complete the scanner is ready for scanning operation with the exception that if a scanner scale was installed calibration will be required before placing the unit into opera tion You must consult the local weights and measures authority to ensure that all legal requirements are met concerning calibration and certifica tion Chapter 5 Calibration contains detailed procedures for calibrat ing the scale in either pounds or kilograms 1 Electronic Article Surveillance EAS operation requires the installation of an aftermarket pur chased EAS system Product Refe
198. el ID to be added to bar code data To set this feature The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled To set this feature I 2i Scan the SWITCH bar code Scan the bar code SET DataBar Omnidirectional LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET DataBar Omnidirectional LABEL ID 6 256 Magellan 8300 8400 DataBar Omnidirectional Enable DataBar Omnidirectional Minimum Reads Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an DataBar Omnidi rectional label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar
199. electable range is a length from 14 to 246 Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 014 100 The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned MUM LABEL SLICE 6 94 Magellan 8300 8400 IBM Features OEM USB Scanner Device Type The OEM USB protocol allows for the scanner to be identified as one of two different types of barcode scanners Depending on what other scan ners you may already have connected to a USB POS you may need to change this setting to enable all scanners to communicate Options are e Table Top Scanner e Handheld Scanner To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code CANNER DEVICE TYPE TABLE Ti SCANNER DEVICE TYPE HANDHELD SCANNE Product Reference Guide 6 95 RS 232 Features RS 232 Baud Rate This feature selects the baud rate required for sending and receiving data Single cable interfaces are limited to Baud Rate selections up to 19200 They cannot communicate at Baud Rates of 38400 a
200. emental Label ID This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when GTIN conversion is enabled and 2 digit supplemental addon bar code labels are converted The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET GTIN 2 DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their correspond ing Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF for each of the two characters 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET GTIN 2 DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6 251 GTIN 5 Digit Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies a GTIN la
201. enabled label quality data is appended to decoded data before being presented to the POS The PIR feature allows the scanner to provide information to an external computer indicating how easy the label was to read CT allows the scanner to provide feedback to the cashier on how to scan in a more ergonomic fashion dealer for information about upgrading your system to include this advanced This value added feature is a factory programmed option Contact your F capability NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code PIR CT DISABLE PIR CT ENABLE 6 31 Product Reference Guide Indication Features Green LED Idle State This feature specifies the state of the green scanner LED when the scanner is idle and ready to read a label Options are e Off e Ondim To set the LED Idle State 1 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 2 Complete the programming seguence by scanning the SWITCH bar code GREEN LED IDLE STATE OFF
202. endix C that rep resent the desired label length A setting of 000 will ignore this length only one fixed length otherwise the selectable range for this option is 002 to 050 even numbers only Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 002 050 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET 12 6 304 Magellan 8300 8400 5 LENGTH 2 of Interleaved 2 of 5 I 2 of 5 Enable I 2 of 5 Correlation This feature enables disables character correlation for I 2 of 5 To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code ORRELAT Product Reference Guide 6 305 RRELATIO I 2 of 5 Stitching Enables disables stitching for I 2 of 5 labels When parts of an I 2 of 5 bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner s software and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensu
203. ength if in variable length mode or the first fixed length if in fixed length mode see DataBar Expanded Length Control Length includes the barcode s check and data characters To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET DataBar Expanded LENGTH 1 below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired label length The selectable range for this option is 01 to 74 Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 001 074 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET DataBar Expanded LENGTH 1 Product Reference Guide 6 263 DataBar Expanded Length 2 Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode or the second fixed length if in fixed length mode see DataBar Expanded Length Control Length includes the barcode s check and data characters To set this feature 1 2 Scan the SWITCH bar code Scan the bar code SET DataBar Expanded LENGTH 2 below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desir
204. ent scanning motions not necessarily faster hand movements Simply slide the item across the scanners horizontal window with as little orientation motion as necessary Leave items in an upright position do not lift and tilt Learn how the scanner functions and where the scanning area is located Do not favor either the vertical or horizontal window slide items across the scanner in their natural orientations on the checkstand as much as possible Site Preparation Overview Consider the following factors before installing the scanner or scanner scale and its optional Remote Scale Display Ventilation Requirements The scanner operates without the use of a ventilation fan As long as there is adequate convective air flow and no major heat producing equipment in close proximity the unit s housing provides adequate heat dissipation The air temperature in the checkstand around the scanner must not exceed 104 F 40 C Service Access Requirements Routine operations such as zero ing and calibration do not require removal of the scanner from the check stand or disassembly of the product The installer should plan service access for the AC DC Power Supply and cables 2 6 Magellan 8300 8400 Site Preparation Overview Recommended Power Installation Since the typical grocery envi ronment includes conveyor belts and electric motors care should be taken to ensure that the scanner has a supply of clean
205. eparing the Scanner Scale for Calibration 1 Assure that the scanner scale is stable secure and properly installed Refer to Chapter 2 Site Preparation and Installation for instruc tions on the proper installation of the scanner scale Power up the scanner scale Allow the unit to reach temperature equilibrium for at least one hour If the scanner scale is already at room temperature allow at least 15 minutes for acclimatization Before performing the calibration the scanner scale must be pre stressed with a weight of more than 30 pounds 15kg With power turned on place the entire weight set including the case on the weighing surface of the scale The display should show an under score and three hyphens __ which is the overweight indica tion Remove all weight from the weighing surface and ensure that there are no obstructions in the debris chutes of the scanner scale See Figure 2 5 Calibrating the Scale Pounds amp Kilograms l Before proceeding ensure that the scanner scale has been prepared for this process by performing the preceding steps titled Preparing the Scanner Scale for Calibration Remove the weigh platter and make sure that there are no obstruc tions in the debris chutes Cut and remove the seal that secures the calibration switch access cover as shown in Figure 5 1 The seal may not be present if this is the initial installation of the scanner scale Magellan 8300 8400
206. er Delay Sets the delay between the end of one character and the beginning of the next in 10 millisecond increments To specify the intercharacter delay 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code below SET KEYBOARD WEDGE INTERCHAR ACTER DELAY You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired delay The selectable range is 0 100 which is the delay in 10 millisecond increments Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 000 100 Examples 001 10ms 005 50ms 040 400ms 100 1 000ms 1 second 4 The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned SET KEYBOARD WEDGE INTERCHARACTER DELAY Product Reference Guide 6 159 Symbology Programming If the scanner s interface type must be changed always be sure that inter face configuration is the FIRST item scanned during a programming ses sion Selecting an interface type resets ALL other configuration items including symbology programming to the factory default for that inter NOTE face type Coupon Control Used to control the method of processing coupon labels Options are e Disable coupon decoding e Enable
207. er Transmission Enables disables transmission of Pharmacode 39 check character To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code MACODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION DISABLE ACODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6 283 Pharmacode 39 Label ID This feature specifies a Pharmacode 39 label ID to be added to bar code data 7 The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature Ik 2 Scan the SWITCH bar code Scan the bar code SET PHARMACODE 39 LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be
208. er to the calibration procedures in this chapter for the proper procedures You may be required by state and or local regulations to have procedures other than these performed by a certified technician or verification offi cial Access to the calibration switch should be restricted with a paper or a wire and lead seal after the calibration has been performed if required by your local regulatory agency The Calibration Sequence must be performed without removing the scanner scale from its installed position The following tools and supplies will be required to perform the calibra tion process 31 5 pound Field Standard Weight Set English calibration only e 18 5 kilogram Field Standard Weight Set Metric calibration only 1 NOTE Throughout the calibration procedures specified weights may be achieved by using a com bination of weights from this set eg 20 lbs may be made up of one 10 00 Ib weight and two 5 00 lb weights 2 NOTE Throughout the calibration procedures specific weights may be achieved by using a com bination of weights from this set eg 10 kgs may be made up of one 5 00 kg and five 1 00 kg weights 5 2 Magellan 8300 8400 Motion Test Motion Test Lead Wire or Paper Seal as required by law This test verifies that the scale will not zero when the weighing surface of the scanner scale is in motion i Verify that the Yellow LED is on and the Remote Display reads 0
209. ers must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner s fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type Prefix must be ASCII characters MO Example M0144769254 Product Reference Guide G 13 Code 93 Prefix must be ASCII characters GO Label length excluding prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner s fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type Example J G0Code93 test DataBar Omnidirectional Prefix must be ASCII characters e0 Check character must be included in label Label length excluding prefix characters must be 14 characters Example e001044123456789 DataBar Expanded Prefix must be ASCII characters e0 Label length excluding prefix characters must be at least 1 character Maximum length is the maximum label size supported by the scan ner Example e001900123456789083103001750 I2 of5 Check character must be included in label data Label length including check characters and excluding prefix charac ters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner s fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type Prefix must be ASCII characters IO I1 or I2 other prefixes specify different check character properties which are not sup ported Example 110123456789 G 14 Magellan 8300 8400 Standard 2 of 5 Check character must be included in label data Label length
210. es amp Connections Considerations when routing the power and interface cables for the scan ner and scanner scale are e Ensure that cables are not pinched kinked or pierced e Do not route interface cables in close proximity to electrical motors or other sources of electromagnetic interference Do not plug the AC power cord into the outlet at this time It is a good practice to always connect the power cable to the scanner first before plug ging it into the AC receptacle The procedures titled Set Up provided later in this chapter will instruct you to connect the power cord at that time Figure 2 19 illustrates the basic cable routing scheme 2 26 Magellan 8300 8400 Installation Overview Figure 2 19 Cable Routing POS Terminal Printer amp Keyboard Remote Cash Drawer x Up Ss Scanner n d y AC Power Switch Remote Scale recommended Display Cable Scanner optional Interface Scanner Scale Cable Scale Interface Cable Scanner Scale Optional To EAS System Product Reference Guide 2 27 Figure 2 20 provides physical dimensions for the AC DC Adapter part number 8 0582 Figure 2 20 Physical Measurements AC DC Adapter Remote Scale Display Placement Installation The modular Remote Displ
211. es below and on the immediately following pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code ARY PORT BAUD R 6 26 Magellan 8300 8400 LIARY PORT BAUD RATE 240 General Scanner Features Auxiliary Port Baud Rate continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan BAUD RATE RS 232 BAUD RATE 9600 Product Reference Guide 6 27 Auxiliary Port Baud Rate continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan RS 232 BAU 19200 D RATE RS 232 BAU 38400 D RATE 6 28 Magellan 8300 8400 General Scanner Features Auxiliary Port Baud Rate continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan RS 232 BAUD R AUD RATE Product Reference Guide 6 29 Laser Failure Mode This configuration item selects whether the scanner should continue oper ating if only one laser is functional The scanner
212. esacmenenens 3 12 Horizontal Scan Window Replacement WRG ii oii neu UR EWE Y YA NI GOD esee x Uin o 3 15 Chapter 4 Problem Isolation e ener eene nme 401 Diagriostic qoe eliam 4 2 Error CodeS iin EET 4 3 Scale Error Report UU MIU 4 6 wer lac GADO OT GOG RID EDD RA CR a n HEH I RE UF Cn FE o YU TG 4 7 Chapter 5 Calibration eiii cisk ds tia YR VE Lu TREE UEREE NWYN YDYN NN EA E US Rai ON Description of Calibration Sequence i ecuscscechessenimuo pacc ise rn re DO RS css ashes pU O LUUD FE 5 2 Mena rM 5 3 Automatic Zero Tracking TESE uii kara tiia ka ge De DDUG AR detur ODRO QURE KC a RrbEPN IUe aE 5 3 Preparing the Scanner Scale for Calibration s iackussase aestate PARADERRRRRIRPRUESEPP SRI DUMP RUNDMNND EUR 5 4 Calibrating the Scale Pounds amp Kilogkalns stssessususctisestonsusk o s ea tdde Tee isla peter ure ad uS MR 5 4 Calibration Verification USS Pounds ie en GG neci nier CCR o Ru EU GE FO Fad a 5 7 Increasing Load Test Phase T 2 uestes En suene rsenrsen cadum E ruit k mah Gina a clo LL Dd E 5 7 cll 5 8 Incredsings oad Test Phase 2 cacenau eGEER UEM S UDoloupu LEN DR EGO NU DIC 5 9 Blanking TEST uan sates DOG CG Gn GN cM b RP INPS ftia adole KR NEAN Ie dadl dU TUNE 5 9 Decredsing Load T65t sei 9e iren citu eade DA Y Gn GOD aaa 5 10 Return to Zero TES au un oni NOG nina qu a3 FERREIRA CERRO ada dale La CA Fe TUD 5 10 Magellan 830
213. ese calibration verification procedures cover five different tests Increasing Load Test Shift Test Blanking Test Decreasing Load Test Return to Zero Test Increasing Load Test Phase 1 This test checks Scale operation for increasing loads from 0 100 kg and 7 50 kg 1 Check that the display reads 0 000 kg when at rest with nothing on the weighing surface The Yellow LED is steadily lit 2 Place a 100 gram weight on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0 100 kg 3 Place an additional 200 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0 300 kg 4 Place an additional 200 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0 500 kg 5 Place an additional 100 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0 600 kg 6 Placean additional 100 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0 700 kg 7 Placean additional 100 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0 800 kg Product Reference Guide 5 11 10 Place an additional 200 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 1 000 kg Increase the weight on the scale to 7 50 kg on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 7 495 and 7 505 kg Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0 000 kg You have co
214. f damage is found report it to your carrier immedi ately e Lift out the accessory box containing the AC DC Power Supply optional Remote Scale Display and cable if present and the Quick Reference Guide e Remove the Quick Reference Guide and familiarize yourself with the unit s controls and features Leave the guide at the checkstand when the installation is complete e Remove the protective packing and carefully lift the unit from the carton Be sure to save the box and all packing material In the event of failure the unit must be returned to the factory in its original packaging e Carefully lift off the L Platter as shown in Figure 2 26 and remove the protective foam pieces securing the weigh mechanism Set the platter back in place For added protection during shipment the L Platter is covered with a tight fitting layer of vinyl as shown in Figure 2 18 This vinyl layer MUST BE REMOVED before placing the unit into service NOTE Product Reference Guide 2 21 Figure 2 18 Remove Protective Vinyl Protective vinyl MUST be removed from the platter before use e Proceed to the Operational Verification instructions below Operational Verification Follow these steps to ensure that your unit has arrived undamaged and is fully functional before installing it in the counter and connecting it to your POS system 1 EAS units ONLY It could be necessary that EAS connections be made previous to power
215. fault configuration y 9 file Restart the unit YES No interface selected Null Interface Select an interface g Call Tech Support Or 3 Error code 4 indicates a failed horizontal VLDM laser assembly while 5 indicates a failed vertical Does the VLDM If configured to do so the diss a scanner will remain operational re with only one of these lasers until Y y the unit can be serviced If both lasers have failed the unit will no longer function Call Tech Support Go to EAS System flowchart YES Does the Does the 7 segment 7 segment YES Go to Remote Display display show display show flowchart Does the i YES au a M Go to Scale flowchart E_ NO R 1 Refer to the feature Laser Failure Unit passes Selftest Mode in Section 6 Product Reference Guide 4 9 Figure 4 4 Problem Isolation Poor No Reading Have you verified that all scan windows are clean and scratch free POOR NO READING START Enter Scanner Diagnostic Mode by holding the Volume Tone Push Button for 4 seconds until first 3 Before proceeding verify that bar code samples presented to scanner are of good quality and a symbology the scanner can read and then 6 rapid tones are sounded then release Scan a known good bar code A good read is signified by one flash of the Green LED and a single beep Does the scanner read the bar code satisfactorily Reset the scanner by holding down the
216. feature which allows the scanner to provide information to an exter nal computer indicating how easy the label was to read CT Checker Training is also a value added feature which allows the scanner to provide feedback to the cashier on how to scan in a more ergonomic fashion To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code AUXILIARY PORT MODE DISABLE 6 24 Magellan 8300 8400 General Scanner Features Auxiliary Port Mode continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan AUXILIARY PORT MODE EXTERNAL HANDHELD INPUT AUXILIARY PORT MODE PIR CT Product Reference Guide 6 25 Auxiliary Port Baud Rate Specifies the baud rate of the auxillary port when operating in PIR CT mode PIR CT is a value added feature which may not have been activated on your model NOTE To specify the Auxiliary Port Baud Rate 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the desired baud rate from the bar cod
217. features and specifications provides regulatory and safety information and lists the symbologies bar code types the scanner will read Chapter 2 Site Preparation and Installation presents physical dimen sions for the scanner or scanner scale and popular accessories and pro vides counter preparation and installation procedures Cable routing connection and testing are additionally detailed in this chapter Chapter 3 Operation and Maintenance contains use and maintenance instructions providing details about operator controls programming and diagnostic modes scale zeroing and calibration Scanner and scale rou tine maintenance is also outlined in this chapter Chapter 4 Problem Isolation outlines the three scanner scale test modes Selftest Operational Tests and Diagnostic Tests Procedures for system problem and troubleshooting flowcharts to aid in problem resolution are also presented in this chapter Chapter 5 Calibration explains scale calibration and verification proce dures including procedures for calibrating the scale in pounds as well as kilograms Product Reference Guide 1 1 Chapter 6 Programming highlights the function s of each programma ble feature and provides a dedicated set of bar codes for configuring scan ner and scanner scale features This chapter is organized by the categories General Features Interface Related Features and Symbology Related Fea tures Appendix A LED Beeper Ind
218. for this option is any decimal value from 001 to 127 4 The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned SET SINGLE CABLE RS 232 ETX CHARACTER Product Reference Guide 6 143 Keyboard Wedge USB Keyboard Features Features listed in this section apply to both the Keyboard Wedge and USB Keyboard interfaces unless otherwise noted Keyboard Interface Keyboard Layout This feature specifies the country language to be supported by the key board To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the appropriate country bar code from the following pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on that and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code USA 6 144 Magellan 8300 8400 D LAYOUT Keyboard Wedge USB Keyboard Features Keyboard Interface Keyboard Layout continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan KEYBOARD LAYOUT BRITAIN D LAYOUT Product Reference Guide 6 145 Keyboard Interface Keyboard Layout continued Remember to cover any unused bar
219. g previous programming sessions Return to Factory Settings Scan this bar code to return the scanner to the default settings configured at the factory for the currently active interface This bar code is typically used to return the scanner to a known operating state when the present programming status is not known faulty or suspect Use this bar code with caution since it will reset ALL features that may have been programmed since the scanner s installation CAUTION DO NOT scan the SWITCH bar code before and after scanning this bar code as the bar code below automatically enters and exits Programming Mode as a part of its function If this bar code is scanned following a SWITCH bar code it will simply cause the scanner to exit Programming Mode without making changes RETURN TO FACTORY SETTINGS 6 10 Magellan 8300 8400 If You Make a Mistake Test Mode Use this feature to place the scanner into a testing or demo mode This special mode disables the scanner interface meaning that bar code data is not sent out to the host via the scanner interface This allows the bar code to be scanned continuously without requiring a response from the POS terminal To return the scanner to normal function scan the TEST MODE DIS ABLE bar code below DO NOT scan the SWITCH bar code before and after scanning the bar codes iz on this page Scanning the TEST MODE DISABLE bar code sets the Double Read NOT
220. g the SWITCH bar code DataBar Expanded DataBar Expanded Product Reference Guide 6 259 DataBar Expanded EAN 128 Emulation Enables disables EAN 128 emulation for DataBar Expanded To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code DataBar Expanded EAN 128 EMULATIO DataBar Expanded EAN 128 EMULATIO 6 260 Magellan 8300 8400 DataBar Expanded Enable DataBar Expanded Label ID This feature specifies an DataBar Expanded label ID to be added to bar code data The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET DataBar Expanded LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs
221. ge Browse the TekForum to find answers to your questions about common technical issues Reseller Technical Support An excellent source for technical assistance and information is an autho rized Datalogic reseller A reseller is acquainted with specific types of busi nesses application software and computer systems and can provide individualized assistance Telephone Technical Support If you do not have internet or email access you may contact Datalogic technical support at 541 349 8281 1 4 Magellan 8300 8400 Scanner and Scanner Scale Nomenclature Scanner and Scanner Scale Nomenclature Controls indicators and other nomenclature are shown in Figure 1 1 Figure 1 1 Scanner Scale Nomenclature Weighing Surface Lean Oversize Produce Here Scanner LED Scale Zero Push Button Speaker Beeper Port in raised position Product Reference Guide 1 5 Connections Two connector panels are located on either side of the scanner as shown in Figure 1 2 The appearance of these panels will vary depending upon the factory options purchased with your model Additionally a service pig tail extends from the scanner s base to connect the control panel cable from the Bonnet area Figure 1 2 Connectors Control Panel Service Loo P Scanner Left Profile Scanner Right Profile
222. has two lasers One for the horizontal window and one for the vertical window Options for this feature are e Single Laser Failure OK The scanner can still operate even if one laser is no longer functional In this mode the scanner will read only from the window associated with the operational laser This provides the user the ability to continue working until the unit is serviced The 7 segment display will show the error code for the failed laser reference Chapter 4 Error Codes but the scanner will continue to function e Single Laser Failure Fatal If it is desirable to have maximum per formance or nothing at all Laser Failure Mode should be selected as fatal Upon single laser failure the scanner will sound an error tone and cease scanning functions until serviced To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code LASER FAILURE MODE SINGLE LASER FAILURE OK LASER FAILURE MODE SINGLE LASER FAILURE FATAL 6 30 Magellan 8300 8400 General Scanner Features Productivity Index Reporting PIR Cashier Training CT When PIR CT is
223. he SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code UPC A TO EAN JAN 13 DISABLE UPC A TO EAN JAN 13 Product Reference Guide 6 165 UPC A Label ID This feature specifies a UPC A label ID to be added to bar code data The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature Ji 2 Scan the SWITCH bar code Scan the bar code SET UPC A LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this opti
224. he SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET ADDON TIMER DURATION below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Addon Timer Duration The selectable range is 1 10 which is the timeout in 10 millisecond increments Pad all sin gle and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 001 010 Examples 001 10ms 003 30ms 008 80ms Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET ADDON TIMER DURATION 6 242 Magellan 8300 8400 Other UPC EAN Options 2 Digit Add ons Minimum Reads Specifies the minimum number of times a 2 digit addon must be read before it is marked as valid and then combined with a base label To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming seguence by scanning the SWITCH bar T ADD ONS MINIMUM code T ADD ONS MINIMUM R Product Reference Guide 6 243 2 Digit Add ons Minimum Reads continue
225. he programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code GONE TIMEO 6 21 Product Reference Guide Label Gone Timeout continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 6 22 Magellan 8300 8400 GONE TIMEOUT General Scanner Features Label Gone Timeout continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan LABEL GONE TIM Product Reference Guide 6 23 EL GONE TIMEOUT 1 Second Auxiliary Port Mode Selects the usage for the scanner s optional auxilliary port The choices listed below are mutually exclusive only one option can be active at a time e Disabled Port is inactive e External Handheld Input Supports Datalogic handheld scan ners QuickScan 1000 QuickScan 6000 PowerScan as well as other models such as the Symbol HotShot Call your dealer for more information about supported devices Cable pinout information for the Auxiliary Port is provided in Appendix B of this manual A connected handheld scanner must be configured to transmit data as outlined in Appendix G NOTE e PIR CT PIR Productivity Index Reporting is a value added
226. host 0 100 Time in 10 millisecond increments To set the Host Echo Quiet Interval l 2 Scan the SWITCH bar code Scan the bar code below SET RS 232 HOST ECHO QUIET INTERVAL You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired timeout The selectable range is 0 100 which is the timeout in 10 millisecond increments Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 000 100 Examples 001 10ms 005 50ms 040 400ms 100 1 000ms 1 second The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned SET RS 232 HOST ECHO QUIET INTERVAL 6 110 Magellan 8300 8400 RS 232 Features RS 232 Ignore Host Commands When set to ignore host commands the scanner will ignore all host com mands except for the minimum set necessary to keep the interface active transmit labels and transmit scale information For normal operation of the interface disable this feature To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you i
227. ht considerations are discussed later in this chapter Vertical Clearance Provision must be made to allow adequate space above the scanner bonnet for removal and replacement of an L shaped platter Optimal clearance permits the platter to be grasped at its top verti cal edge and lifted for removal without obstruction such as a fixed key board mount or any type of enclosure Should such an enclosure be Product Reference Guide 2 7 unavoidable an alternate method of platter removal using two coins may be employed however a minimum vertical clearance of 1 5 3 8 cm MUST be provided reference Figure 2 4 Another consideration is that the scan zone must be kept free of obstructions such as enclosures key board mounts etc Figure 2 4 Vertical Clearance DO NOT Obstruct L Platter Removal Keyboard Mount Allow a minimum Enclosure Ventilation and Spacing DO NOT Obstruct Scan Zone clearance of A 1 5 3 8cm The scanner scales perimeter housing has been designed to provide ade quate space for convective cooling and unrestricted movement of the weighing apparatus Figure 2 5 shows the debris chutes and ventilation slots The checkstand design must allow The ambient air temperature inside the checkstand adjacent to the scanner must not exceed 104 F 40 C 2 8 Magellan 8300 8400 Ventilation and Spacing e sou
228. ht limit for your scale is not set at 15 kilograms begin by placing weight equaling your upper limit setting plus 0 8 kilograms 2 Remove weights to leave 10 kilograms on the scale and verify that the display shows between 9 990 and 10 010 kilograms 3 Remove an additional 9 00 kilograms from the scale and check that the scale reads 1 000 kg 4 You have completed the Decreasing Load Test Return to Zero Test This test ensures that after all other tests have been completed success fully the scanner scale returns to zero Without any weight on the weigh platter verify that the scale reads 0 000 kg You have completed the calibration and verification process for weighing in kilograms If the scanner scale passes all these tests 1 Remove the weigh platter install the calibration switch cover and install a seal if required 2 Reinstall the weigh platter If the scanner scale fails any of these tests it should be serviced by a quali fied technician Product Reference Guide 5 15 NOTES 5 16 Magellan 8300 8400 Chapter 6 Programming Introduction to Label Programming The programming bar code labels contained in this manual will allow you to customize and configure features and settings for your scanner scan ner scale To ensure full compatibility and proper function use only the programming bar codes in this manual and other product specific publi cations to program scanner features This
229. ia CE yN yD AE ES 6 10 if You Makea MistaKeieu 1i GO AER a OY O Ced O FADOG DUR ddd 6 10 Return to Factory Settings crisissen EG UR RD NW aaa NAG OO 6 10 Test MOGE ien Fe aicacccmaanaaniuntaces GG OO CG ifi ddn aaa 6 11 General Scamnner Features ue mara inane sen Gu ae uus GR Eu FN CRUG aln ales GO GT BF Gta 6 12 Scanner Button OpPtONS se iie ioo uwy DG r i tco E e pM e iair dT iN y eno 6 12 Double Redd Main 11 19 ESPERE HE HEFFER FFF HF FREE FFF 6 14 Laser TImeollb aea iiu a RAD A dum Ter n a SIN Aa Gn aaia 6 16 Motor TIMEOUT Y iieciimipaneasananten In GI DRRI EMEN TERR OO EMG DROKMN DK ENRNE RU 6 18 Label Gone TIMEOUT issues iiianoe GCR saga pes aT ossa RUM EEA 6 21 Auxiliary Port Mode eii FA 6 24 Auxiliary Port Baud Rate 2 crore siaaadaneieeeditenadenabnt aaa a EAE 6 26 Laser Failure MOd ce 6 30 Productivity Index Reporting PIR Cashier Training CT emm 6 31 Indication ai cT i TEN NF FFH HEH NF RF RF HN RYN HE NF FFIN FETH FN HE FE TFEFYN TEN RUE 6 32 Green LED Idle Stat i HYFFFFFEN REF HF ET FFAN RHUF HIN HE FE FFEFRYN YT 6 32 Power Up Beep Control aai iiestauee iru tu eta RR nd ddad UO DDR RD ODD ORG ARA RI cR dd OU UE FR es s5 6 33 Good Read Beep Control eie ei RE GG DUR tees RIG GN FR FRY GODDEF RRRS 6 34 Good Read Beep Freque ey su situs GG nione rittoricuimuin exitu Ryd dAn fy FF id nc GwM 6 35 Good Read Beep llemgth sccsisiecnongssenatensrsencenswensaedGuanss RF En RG an
230. ications amp Controls contains tables describ ing the various functions and indications of the scanner scale control panel features Appendix B Cable Information references wire requirements connector specifications and pinout details for product cabling Appendix C Keypad is a set of bar codes representing the digits and char acters required to enter extended programming data needed during certain programming sessions Appendix D Host Commands furnishes a partial listing of available host commands that can be used with a compatible host interface Appendix E Keyboard Function Key Mappings summarizes the key board models their defined protocol scancode set and some unique fea tures Other tables in this chapter provide the function key maps associated with each of the scancode sets Appendix F Factory Defaults lists factory default programmable settings for common interfaces Appendix G Handheld Data Format Requirements contains application notes describing the general format of data accepted by the scanner through the auxilliary port as transmitted from a handheld scanner How to Use This Manual Reference the first chapter of this manual for a general description of the product s features and an outline of the manual s contents and organiza tion View the remaining chapters for procedures regarding scanner or scanner scale installation operation maintenance calibration and bar code programming 1 2
231. iii Magellan 8300 8400 Datalogic Handheld Data Format Requirements ccsccccsccssccicscvsnanessnstaceewereccendanensuanennenas G 2 AIMUROGMAES 2 15 Gn iu wn Ri DR MM RON hema nanndeceat bine OD ad dL DG d OADD G 10 Product Reference Guide ix NOTES Magellan 8300 8400 DATALOGIC SCANNING INC MAGELLAN END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT Notice to End User The Datalogic Product you have acquired contains embedded Software which is integral to the product s operation This Software is being provided to you under license subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement If you use the Datalogic Product you will be deemed to have accepted the terms and conditions of this Agreement If you do not intend to be bound to the terms of this Agreement Data logic is not willing to license the Software to you you may not use the Datalogic Product or the Software and you must contact the party from whom you acquired the Datalogic Product for instructions This End User Software License Agreement Agreement is a legally binding agreement governing the licensing of the Software and Documentation by Dat alogic Scanning Holdings Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Datalogic to the entity or person who has purchased or otherwise acquired a Datalogic Product End User For purposes of this Agreement any software that is associated with a separate end user license agreement is licensed to you under the terms of that license agreement Data
232. including check characters and excluding prefix charac ters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner s fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type Prefix must be an ASCII character SO other prefixes specify dif ferent check character properties which are not supported Example S00123456789 Code 128 EAN128 Prefix must be either ASCII characters CO C1 or C2 Label length excluding prefix character must meet reguirements imposed by the main scanner s fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type If EAN 128 Symbology is Enabled and prefix is C1 label will be identified as an EAN 128 otherwise it is identified as a Code 128 A prefix of CO designates that no function code is present in the Ist or 2nd character position A prefix of C2 designates that a function code 1 is present in the 2nd character Example COCode_128 Test Product Reference Guide G 15 NOTES G 16 Magellan 8300 8400 ASCII Character Set The table on this page shows a set of ASCII characters and their corresponding Hex Values The Hex Values in this table are needed for setting symbology specific label identifiers as well as enabling custom prefix and suffix characters ASCII Hex Conversion Table ASCI Hex ASCI Hex ASCI Hex ASCI Hex IChar No IChar No IChar No IChar No NUL 00 SP 20 40 60 SOH 01 21 A 41 a 61 STX 02 a 22 B 42
233. ion of the label is specified in the section below The AIM identifiers on the received label may or may not be transmitted to the POS and are controlled according to the data formatting settings of the scanner The following sections describe the prefix strings and identify what spe cific label characteristics can be supported If a label does not have one of the AIM identifiers specified below and the first three characters of the label data fit the following qualifications e the first character is a e the second character is a capital letter or a small letter e the third character is a digit then the label is transmitted to the host with the AIM identifier still appended to the beginning of the label data UPC A e AIM does not specify UPC A as a separate symbology using this transmission format labels will be transmitted as EAN 13 e Example E00060992011187 UPC E e AIM does not specify UPC E as a separate symbology using this transmission format labels will be transmitted as EAN 13 e Example E00000000998875 EAN 13 Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor rect G 10 Magellan 8300 8400 Prefix must be ASCII characters E0 total length including prefix must be 16 Example E01101234567891 EAN 8 Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor tect Prefix must be ASCII characters JE4 total length including prefix must
234. ions Calibration Switch A cover restricts access to the Calibration Switch to help guard against unauthorized tampering when sealed The Calibration Switch is located just beneath the Spider in the location indicated in Figure A 1 There are regulations that must be followed in order to ensure LEGAL NOTE compliance when operating a weighing device such as the scan LEGAL NOTE ner scale Failure to observe and comply with these regulations could result in legal action Figure A 1 Calibration Switch Magellan 8300 8400 Appendix B Cable Information Introduction The following pages contain pinout information enabling you to create standard interface cables for use in interconnecting the scanner scale external handheld scanner and POS terminal General Specifications Wire Requirements e Cable length should not exceed 15 feet Wire gauge Standard for RJ 45 connectors 28 26 AWG e If run exceeds 15 feet we recommend 26 AWG wire size Product Reference Guide B 1 RS 232 Cable Pinout Scanner Connector Hardware RJ45 10 Position Cable Pinout Table B 1RS 232 Cable Pinouts PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION 1 N C No Connection 2 CTS in Clear To Send input 3 N C No Connection 4 RTS out Reguest To Send output 5 RxD in Receive Data Input 6 Tx
235. ions of this Agreement shall not prevent the party s later enforcement of such terms and conditions 11 4 Governing Law Venue This Agreement and the rights of the parties hereunder shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Oregon U S A without regard to the rules governing conflicts of law The state or federal courts of the State of Oregon located in either Mult nomah or Lane counties shall have exclusive jurisdiction over all matters regarding this Agreement except that Datalogic shall have the right at its absolute discretion to initiate proceedings in the courts of any other state country or territory in which End User resides or in which any of End User s assets are located 11 5 Attorneys Fees In the event an action is brought to enforce the terms and conditions of this Agreement the prevailing party shall be entitled to reason able attorneys fees both at trial and on appeal END xii Magellan 8300 8400 Chapter 1 Introduction This Product Reference Guide contains comprehensive instructions on scanner or scanner scale installation Either model may be termed scan ner for the purpose of simplicity in this manual Also included are feature configuration using special programming feature bar code labels and advanced user information as described in the following chapter descrip tions Manual Overview Chapter 1 Introduction outlines the manual s contents details
236. ired if weight doesn t return to zero between weight requests from the POS plus scale will require re zeroing if a non zero weight is left on for more than two minutes or if the scale is below zero e Non Zero for Two Minutes Re zeroing is required if weight does not return to zero within two minutes To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan The strategy is to select the lowest possible filter level needed that allows normal scale operation 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code 6 44 Magellan 8300 8400 ENFORCED ZERO RETURN Scale Features Scale Enforced Zero Return continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan FORCED ZERO NON o 2 MINUTES ci a ZERO NFORCED ZERO RETURN NON ZERO FOR 2 MINUTES OR ZERO OR NO ZERO BETWEEN WEIGHTS Product Reference Guide 6 45 Scale Enforced Zero Return continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only
237. is equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate WARNING radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications How ever there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help Canadian Notice This equipment does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emis sions as described in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Le present appareil numerique n emet pas de bruits radioelectrigues depas sant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de la classe B pres crites dans le Reglement sur le brouill
238. is feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan bar code below or from the following page for the desired set ting You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming seguence by scanning the SWITCH bar code ARDWARE CONTROL 6 104 MagellanTM 8300 8400 RS 232 Features RS 232 Hardware Control continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan CONTROL ENABLE OL ENABLE CTS SCAN CONTROL Product Reference Guide 6 105 RS 232 Hardware Control continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan TROL ENABLE 6 106 Magellan 8300 8400 RS 232 Features RS 232 Intercharacter Delay Specifies delay between the end of one character and the beginning of the next in 10 millisecond increments To set the RS 232 Intercharacter Delay 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code below SET RS 232 INTERCHARACTER DELAY You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C th
239. isabled NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET EAN 8 2 DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET EAN 8 2 DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6 203 EAN 8 5 Digit Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies an EAN 8 5 Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data E The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature A 2 Scan the SWITCH bar code Scan the bar code SET EAN 8 5 DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below You ll need to cover an
240. ither the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code IRST CHARACTER TRANSMISSION 3 FIRST CHARACTER TRANSMISSION 6 184 Magellan 8300 8400 EAN 13 Enable EAN 13 Check Character Transmission Enables disables transmission of an EAN JAN 13 check character To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code 3 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION K CHARACTER TRANSMISSIO Product Reference Guide 6 185 EAN 13 ISBN Conversion Enable Enables disables conversion of EAN JAN 13 labels starting with 978 to Bookland ISBN labels ISBN the add on data will be discarded Only the base label will be con If any add on information is present on the label prior to the conversion to verted NOTE To set this feature 1
241. ix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET EAN 8 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6 205 EAN 8 Decoding Levels Decoding levels allow the decoder to be set to perform at one of four selectable levels e Very Conservative Slower scan time virtually eleminates mis reads The most secure setting e Slightly More Aggressive Faster scanning more aggressive yet minimizes misreads e Moderately Aggressive Even faster scanning even more aggres sive e Very Aggressive Fastest scan speed most aggressive y A88 P 88 AN Use caution when setting this feature as the aggressive settings for this fea ture allow a higher potential for misreads CAUTION To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code representing the desired option on the following pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on faci
242. ks to ensure that items placed anywhere on the weigh ing surface of the scanner scale are weighed properly Refer to Figure 5 2 when performing this test 1 Place and remove in succession a ten pound load on the center of each of the four guadrants 1 2 3 and 4 in Figure 5 2 of the scan ner scale s weigh platter Verify that a reading of between 9 99 and 10 01 Ib registers under load and that the display returns to 0 00 between each load 2 After verifying the accuracy of each guadrant of the weighing sur face remove all weight from the scale You have completed the Shift Test Figure 5 2 Shift Test 5 8 MagellanTM 8300 8400 Calibration Verification U S Pounds Increasing Load Test Phase 2 After completing the Shift Test you must complete the Increasing Load Test using 20 0 25 0 and 30 0 pounds of weight and may not necessarily be set at 30 pounds which is the standard setting For this test continue to place weights in five pound increments only up to the upper weight limit set for your scale 7 The upper limit of the scale is configurable according to POS interface type NOTE 1 With the scale starting at zero place 20 0 pounds in the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 19 99 and 20 01 Ib 2 Place an additional five pounds in the center of the weighing sur face increasing the load to 25 0 pounds and check that the display reads between
243. l Operating Mode but per formance may be affected until a correction or repair is made Operational Configuration Once Selftest diagnostics have been successfully run a tone is emitted if configured to do so and the unit enters an operational configuration state The scanner or scanner scale will automatically load your specific interface settings which are required to communicate with the host system There are two conditions that must be met before the unit can enter Operating Mode e No bar code label can be in the scan volume while the unit is in this state Progress is halted until the label has been removed thereby ensuring that no extraneous bar code data is send to the host If your scanner has a scale the scale cannot be in motion usually caused by excessive vibration in the checkstand for this test to suc ceed A Scale in Motion status will be indicated by displaying a period and the applicable weight unit Ib or kg __ kg that is selected e The scale must be able to capture zero weight The display will be seen if there is a weight on the platter at power up Removing the weight or pressing the Scale Zero Push Button should allow the scale to find zero 1 Scanner behavior under non fatal error conditions is configurable See Chapter 6 Program ming for more details 3 6 Magellan 8300 8400 Operational Modes When the scanner or scanner scale completes its Selftest successfu
244. le acter Transmission 12 of 5 Label ID i B2 i So 9 Length Gore Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable 2 of 5 Length 1 6 6 6 6 6 6 12 of 5 Length 2 50 50 50 50 50 50 Product Reference Guide F 13 RS 232 Wincor Keybd RS 232 Nixdorf Single Wedge IBM OEM USB Cable 2 of 5 Correlation Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable 2 of 5 Stitching Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable 2 of 5 Minimum Reads 1 1 1 1 1 1 Standard 2 of 5 Std Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable 2 of 5 Enable Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Cal Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable culation Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Transmission Standard 2 of 5 Label ID Standard 2 of 5 Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Length Control Standard 2 of 5 Length 1 8 j 8 Standard 2 of 5 Length 2 50 50 50 50 50 50 Standard2of5 Cor pe Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable relation Standard 2 of 5 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Stitching Standard 2 of 5 Mini 1 1 1 1 1 1 mum Reads Codabar Enable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable F 14 Magellan 8300 8400 RS 232 Wincor Keybd RS 232 Nixdorf Single Wedge IBM OEM USB Ca
245. libration error e the weigh module has been replaced Follow the procedures on the following pages to ensure that the scanner scale will meet Weights and Measurement requirements Certification of the scanner scale s weighing apparatus is subject to Fed eral State and Local Weights and Measures statutes and is restricted to authorized government agencies and or duly registered agents thereof Anytime a scale is calibrated it should be properly sealed with a lead and wire or paper seal before being placed into service It is your responsibility to check with the appropriate authorities in your area to ensure compliance with pertinent regulations before removing any official seals or placing a newly calibrated scanner scale into ser vice Product Reference Guide 5 1 Description of Calibration Sequence The Calibration Sequence sets the scale to an accurate reference point for weighing This process involves the use of a Field Standard Weight Set 31 5 pounds for calibration in pounds 18 5 kilograms for Metric Once calibration has been successfully completed the scanner scale uses the certified weight as a reference for subsequent weighing activities These verification procedures follow the U S National Institute of Stan dards and Technology 44 Handbook guidelines for bench counter scale installations If any of these tests fail to meet the required weight indications you must calibrate the scanner scale Ref
246. llows the scanner the ability to stitch exact UPC A EAN 13 label haves with no overlapping characters To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code C EAN STITCH EXACT LABEL HALVES DISA STITCH EXACT LABEL HALVES 6 226 Magellan 8300 8400 Other UPC EAN Options UPC EAN Stitch Unlike Label Halves When enabled this allows the scanner the ability to stitch two UPC A EAN 13 label halves together that may contain differing characters To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH UPC EAN STITCH UNLIKE LABEL HALVES DISABLE bar code N STITCH UNLIKE LABEL HALVES Product Reference Guide 6 227 UPC EAN Character Reconstruction Enables Disables character reconstruction on UPC EAN labels To
247. lly it emits a tone when configured to do so and enters Operating Mode Operating Mode Operating Mode includes Normal Operation scanning EAS deactivation and weighing and Sleep Mode These two modes are most commonly observed by the user operator Normal Operation This condition is indicated by the scanner green LED being on dim and steady For scanner scale models the scale yellow LED indicates that the scale senses a weight of zero on the platter If you have a scanner without scale model the yellow lamp will not be lit when the scanner is ready for scanning Yellow and Green LED indications are configurable Your scanner may not be programmed to operate in the standard manner described above Once the scanner enters Normal Operation it begins a countdown sequence If there is no activity during a preset period of time also called time out the unit will shut off the laser and or motor in order to pro long the life of the electrical and mechanical components Once the scan ner has timed out it enters Sleep Mode 1 Timeout and Sleep Mode time delays are programmable features that can be selected through use of the programming labels included in Chapter 6 Programming Product Reference Guide 3 7 Sleep Mode After the scanner has been left idle for a preset period of time the laser and or motor automatically turns off goes to sleep This state is called Sleep Mode and is indicated by a slow
248. logic and End User hereby agree as follows 1 Definitions 1 1 Documentation means materials such as user s guides program reference guides quick reference guides manuals or similar materials associated with or related to the Datalogic Product whether in printed online or other form 1 2 Proprietary Information means a source code object code software documentation and any related internal design system design data base design algorithms technology technical data or information implementation technigues and trade secrets related to the Software b any other trade secrets marked appropriately or identified as proprietary or confidential and c any information that End User under the circumstances should recog nize as confidential Proprietary Information does not include any information that the receiving party can establish was 1 in the public domain 2 already in the receiving party s possession or rightfully known prior to receipt 3 rightfully learned from a third party not in violation of any other s pro prietary rights or 4 independently developed without access to Proprietary Information 1 3 Datalogic Product means the Datalogic Magellan M 800i Magellan 1000i series Magellan M 1100i series Magellan M 1400i series Magel lan MM 2200VS series Magellan M 2300HS series Magellan 3200VSi series Magellan M 3300HSi series Magellan 8100 series Magel TM TM TM TM TM TM lan 8200 series Magellan
249. lue from 00 to FF 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code Product Reference Guide 6 187 SET EAN 13 LABEL ID EAN 13 2 Digit Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies an EAN 13 2 Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data 7 NOTE The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled To set this feature Ik 2 Scan the SWITCH bar code Scan the bar code SET EAN 13 2 DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 T and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET EAN 13 2 DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID 6 188
250. ly the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate characters digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the hex designation for the desired character s A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF Up to 20 hex pairs can be designated Z To specify no Global Prefix scan 00 NOTE 4 If designating the full 20 hex pairs the scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned If designating less than 20 hex pairs you can end the programming sequence early by scanning the TERMINATE SEQUENCE bar code 5 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code 6 82 Magellan 8300 8400 Interface Related Features Global Prefix continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan SET GLOBAL PREFIX MINATE SEQU Product Reference Guide 6 83 Global Suffix This feature specifies the suffix that is added to end of a label tra
251. m specifies the method the scanner will use to handle errors detected while waiting to receive the ACK character from the host Errors include unrecognized host commands and communication errors such as parity or framing errors e Ignore Errors recommended setting e Assume ACK risk of lost label data Assume NAK risk of duplicate label To select the option for RS 232 ACK NAK Error Handling 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the desired option from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code NAK ERROR HANDLING IGNORE ERRORS 6 126 Magellan 8300 8400 RS 232 Features RS 232 ACK NAK Error Handling continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan NAK ERROR HANDLING RROR HANDLING Product Reference Guide 6 127 RS 232 Indicate Transmission Failure Enables disables an audible error indication upon a transmission failure S 232 INDICATE TRANSMISSION FAILURE DISA RS 232 INDICATE TRANSMISSION FAILURE ENABLE
252. med option Contact your dealer for information about upgrading your system to include this advanced capability NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code DataBar Omnidirectional DataBar Omnidirectional 6 254 Magellan 8300 8400 DataBar Omnidirectional Enable DataBar Omnidirectional EAN 128 Emulation Enables disables the ability of DataBar Omnidirectional to be transmitted as EAN 128 To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH DataBar Omnidirectional EAN 128 EMULATION DISABLE bar code DataBar Omnidirectional EAN 128 EMULATION Product Reference Guide 6 255 DataBar Omnidirectional Label ID 7 NOTE This feature specifies an DataBar Omnidirectional lab
253. mm drill bit optional 2 30 Magellan 8300 8400 Remote Scale Display Placement Installation Figure 2 22 Physical Measurements Remote Display 28 4mm Dual Display Single Display TN 1 y Ll EE jov 116 39mm 116 39mm y aof 1 41 99mm Ld Oo b HM l jt k 85 1mm 5 Feed the entire length of the Remote Scale Display interface cable through the cable routing hole so that the assembled Remote Scale Display can be positioned over the mounting screw holes If present remove the rubber band from the connector end 7 Install mounting screws or bolts to complete the installation of the Remote Scale Display Take care not to pinch or pierce the interface cable while securing the Remote Scale Display to the checkstand Product Reference Guide 2 31 Figure 2 23 Remote Scale Display Mounting Mounting Example Dual Display 4 61cm oq Y oo A TN 3 oo os optional cable Y routing 2 32 Magellan 8300 8400 Set Up amp Installation Ch
254. model H The button must be configured to enable standard functions or Scale Diagnostics will not be an available feature Reference Chapter 6 NOTE Scanner Button Options for programming details Table A 3 Scale Zero Push Button Functions PRESS DURATION FUNCTION COMMENT When programmed to do so the yellow LED should be lit when no Momentary Zero Scale weight is on the scale indicating scale at zero If it is not press the switch to zero the scale This mode allows system support personnel to troubleshoot prob lems with the scale Momentarily press the Scale Zero Push Button or cycle power to exit Scale Diagnostics Mode Scale Diagnostics 4 Seconds Mode a Diagnostics Mode is meant for use by trained systems support personnel Users should not need to ini tiate this function under normal circumstances Product Reference Guide A 5 Calibration Switch This switch initiates the scale s calibration routine A certified weight set is needed to perform the scale calibration steps detailed in Chapter 5 Cali bration This switch is not included in scanners without scale modules Calibration Switch Seal This seal allows you to secure the Calibration Switch access cover and restrict access to the Calibration Switch If the calibration seal is broken or missing you may be prohibited from operating the scale without recertifi cation Check local and state requirements for specific restrict
255. mplete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET UPC E 2 DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID 6 178 Magellan 8300 8400 UPC E Enable UPC E 5 Digit Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies a UPC E 5 Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET UPC E 5 DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET UPC E 5 DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
256. mpleted the Increasing Load Test Phase 1 Shift Test Metric The Shift Test checks to ensure that items placed anywhere on the weigh ing surface of the scanner scale are weighed properly Refer to Figure 5 3 when performing this test 1 Place and remove in succession a 5 0 kilogram load on the center of each of the four quadrants 2 3 4 and 5 in Figure 5 3 and in the center 1 of the scanner scale s weighing platform Verify that the display shows a reading of between 4 995 and 5 005 kg for each quadrant center test and that the display returns to 0 000 between each load After verifying the accuracy of each quadrant and the center of the weighing surface remove all weight from the scale You have com pleted the Shift Test 5 12 Magellan 8300 8400 Calibration Verification Kilograms Figure 5 3 European Shift Test Metric Increasing Load Test Phase 2 After completing the Shift Test you must complete the Increasing Load Test using 10 00 12 50 and 15 kilograms of weight and may not necessarily be set at 15 kilograms which is the standard setting For this test continue to place weights in 2 50 kilgram increments only up to the upper weight limit set for your scale gy The upper limit of the scale is configurable according to POS interface type NOTE 1 Place 10 00 kilograms in the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 9 990 kg and 10 010
257. n Deactivating EAS Labels Deactivation of EAS Electronic Article Surveillance anti theft labels is an additional function that can be performed by the scanner More informa tion about this feature can be referenced under the following topics Chapter 3 Deactivating Security Labels e Chapter 6 EAS Features Product Reference Guide 1 7 Weighing Specifications for scale capacity settling time minimum and maximum static weight zeroing and warm up time are given below For more infor mation regarding the topic Proper Weighing Technique refer to Chapter 3 Operation and Maintenance in this manual Rated Weight Capacity The scale s operational weight capacity is e 30 00 pounds displayed in 0 01 increments OR e 15 000 kilograms displayed in 0 005 increments Minimum Increment The minimum weight that can be accurately measured by the scale is 0 01 Ib 0 005 kg Maximum Static Weight Overload A maximum static weight of 150 pounds 68 kg can be sustained by the scale without incurring damage or degrading performance Automatic Zero Maintenance The scale s software constantly monitors and adjusts the Zero point as long as the deviation is within acceptable limits while compensating for any debris accumulation or removal During power up the scale automat ically re zeros after verifying that all subsystems are functional Addition ally the scale may be manually zeroed by pushing the S
258. n ESSEY MINIMUM SSEY MINIMUM 6 356 Magellan 8300 8400 Appendix A LED Beeper Indications amp Controls Figure A 1 shows the operators controls and indicators The descriptions following identify the use or function of each component Figure A 1 Scanner and Scale Controls Scanner LED Indicator Volume Tone Button Scale Zero Button amp LED Product Reference Guide A 1 Controls and Indicators The control panel consists of a green LED indicator a Volume Tone push button and a Scale Zero push button LED indicator as described in the following pages The unit also includes a beeper which can be configured to sound indications of scanning weighing and deactivation activities Since beeper indications are configurable your unit may not be pro H grammed to sound all the indications listed For more information see Chapter 6 Programming in this manual NOTE LED and Beeper Indications Scanner and Scale LEDs The Scanner LED indicates scanner status and the Scale LED which is in combination with the Scale push button is primarily used to show scale status see Table A 1 Table A 1 Scanner and Scale LED Indications LED INDICATION DURATION COMMENT Scale Yellow LED on steady The scale is at rest and reads zero weight The Scale at Zero scale is ready to weigh iyad Scanner Active UM reen DEP
259. n 10 msec increments that scale data is presented to the host before being discarded To set the Timeout 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH STALE WEIGHT TIMEOUT 200 msec bar code EOUT 230 msec Product Reference Guide 6 131 Single Cable RS 232 Stale Weight Timeout contin ued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan TALE WEIGHT TIMEOUT 250 msec 0 msec 6 132 Magellan 8300 8400 Single Cable RS 232 Options Single Cable RS 232 Scale Transmit Weight Digits Specifies whether the scale transmits weight data as five digits or as four digits To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code below representing the desired option You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH TRANSMIT WEIGHT DIGITS FIVE DIGITS bar code NSMI
260. n intellectual property 5 3 The provisions of this Proprietary Information Section shall survive and continue for five 5 years after the termination of this Agreement 6 Limited Warranty 6 1 Datalogic warrants that under normal use and operation the Datalogic Product will conform substantially to the applicable Documentation for the period specified in the Documentation During this period for all reproducible nonconformities for which Datalogic has been given written notice Data logic will use commercially reasonable efforts to remedy nonconformities verified by Datalogic End User agrees to supply Datalogic with all reasonably requested information and assistance necessary to help Datalogic in remedying such nonconformities For all defects reported to Datalogic within the warranty period Datalogic s liability is limited to providing End User with one copy of corrections or responding to End User s problem reports accord Product Reference Guide XI ing to Datalogic s standard assistance practices Datalogic does not warrant that the product will meet End User s requirements or that use of the prod uct will be uninterrupted or error free or that Datalogic s remedial efforts will correct any nonconformance This limited warranty does not cover any product that has been subjected to damage or abuse whether intentionally accidentally or by neglect or to unauthorized repair or unauthorized instal lation and shall be void if End U
261. n me Foure 216 Product Reference Guide 2 13 Conveyor Optional Item Diverter 6 3 16 0cm Keyboard Check Writing e Stand Optional Figure 2 7 Typical Checkstand Design amp Cutout Location Remote Display WY S POS Terminal amp Printer Scan amp Bag Well Optional Take Away Belt Bagging Area _ Deadplate _ Scanner _ Cash Drawer Below Scanner Below Flush Incorrect 2 14 Magellan 8300 8400 Counter Cutout Figure 2 8 Short Shelf Model 8301 8401 Cutout Dimensions Model 8301 8401 Short cheesiest Minimum Cutout 0 635cm 4x Dimensions 29 53cm Model 8301 8401 Short Supports d i 1 re ap i m Liquid Liquid fin m mn ril i 4 Drainage Drainage Support Rails Figure 2 9 Short Shelf Model 8301 8401 Scanner Reference Dimensions Model 8301 8401 Short Scanner Reference Dimensions 11 5 29 21cm 0 1cm 927 56 23 6cm 7 1422m x 0 2cm T i 4 08 Fn 10 36cm x0 15cm s 13 85 35 19cm 0 15cm Product Reference Guide 2 15 Figure 2 10 Medium Shelf Models 8302 8304 8402 8404 Cutout Dimensions Mo
262. n required Since internal scanner and scale components cannot be replaced by an operator or installer most functional errors will require the assistance of a trained technical support person However if the prob lem is caused by faulty cable power supply or remote display you can fix the problem by replacing the defective component and complete the installation 4 2 Magellan 8300 8400 Error Codes Error Codes If an error is detected the scanner will sound a long low tone for one sec ond and alternately flash its LEDs indicating a failure Following the long low tone an error code will appear on the 7 segment display refer to Figure 4 1 Pressing the Volume Tone Push button will cause the scanner to sound a series of beeps corresponding to that error code Table 4 1 on the following page describes what these codes mean and what action should be taken for each When troubleshooting always remember to check all cable connections first before proceeding with other problem isolation steps Product Reference Guide 4 3 Error Code 0 Blinking C E Decimal Point Table 4 1 Error Codes Probable Cause Configuration Configuration Error Interface Board Motor Horizontal Laser Vertical Laser Digital Board Scale Remote Display Control Button Stuck Hardware ID Scale Calibration CPLD ID 3 3 V Present Corrective Action No POS interface has been selected Null i
263. n t favor either the horizontal or vertical scan windows Keep items in their natural orientation Remember to slide or push items rather than picking them up By avoiding any gripping twisting and rotation of your hands and wrists you can prevent repetitive motion injuries This technigue also relieves you from lifting possibly thousands of pounds per day e Develop a smooth fluid motion during scanning sharing work egually between hands e Use the entire hand for grasping and lifting items MagellanTM 8300 8400 Develop efficient scanning motions not necessarily faster hand movements e Learn typical locations for bar codes on packages avoid flipping or rotating the items during scanning Learn how the scanner functions and where the scanning area is located Deactivating Security Labels EAS Electronic Article Surveillance labels can be detected and deacti vated by a system equipped with this option This is accomplished by means of a deactivation antenna mounted under the scanner platter EAS labels should be brought near the antenna to be deactivated Reference the documentation for the EAS device for more details about its installation and function Product Reference Guide 3 3 Proper Weighing Technique 1 The L shaped All Weighs platter allows you to place items any where on its surface including leaning against its vertical section to be weighed accurately The Produce Rail or
264. n the example three digits must be scanned from the number pad in Appendix C This type of format requiring several bar codes is nec essary to allow flexible programming for item values with larger numeric ranges The programming sequence shown in example C requires scanning of a single extended length bar code This special programming bar code contains all the data necessary to enter Programming Mode set the Item Tag and Item Value and exit Programming Mode all in one step 1 An Item Tag is a term used to describe an assigned number which is encoded in a programming bar code that toggles selects enables disables etc a specific programming feature 6 8 Magellan 8300 8400 Programming Overview Table 6 1 Programming Sequence c 2 3415 6 2 ENABLE EW FEATURE NN TN ENABLE NEW FEATURE USING THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS WL CONTAINS SWITCH Product Reference Guide 6 9 LED and Beeper Indicators The scanner provides a set of indicators that verify announce the various scanner functions If You Make a Mistake If during a programming session you find that you are unsure of the scanner s settings or wish to reset the scanner s configuration use the Return to Factory Settings label below to return the scanner s configura tion to the factory settings Scanning this label will also reset any changes made durin
265. n the following pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming seguence by scanning the SWITCH bar EAN 13 MINIMUM READS 1 NIMU code EAN 13 MI MREADS 2 Product Reference Guide 6 191 NIMU EAN 13 Minimum Reads continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 MINIMUM R 3 MINIMUM R 6 192 Magellan 8300 8400 EAN 13 Enable Bookland Label ID This feature specifies a Bookland label ID to be added to bar code data The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET BOOKLAND LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair
266. n the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 T and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code TANDARD 2 of 5 LAB 6 312 Magellan 8300 8400 Standard 2 of 5 Std 2 of 5 Enable Standard 2 of 5 Length Control This feature specifies whether variable length or fixed length decoding will be set for Standard 2 of 5 To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code iz You must now set Standard 2 of 5 Length 1 and Standard 2 of 5 Length 2 D 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL VARIABLE NOTE D 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL Prod
267. nd the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH SCALE CALIBRATION NOTIFICATION DISABLE bar code E CALIBRATION NOTIFICATIO Product Reference Guide 6 49 Scale Intercharacter Delay Sets the delay between the end of one character and the beginning of the next in 10 millisecond increments To specify the intercharacter delay 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code below SET KEYBOARD WEDGE INTERCHAR ACTER DELAY You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired delay The selectable range is 0 100 which is the delay in 10 millisecond increments Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 000 100 Examples 001 10ms 005 50ms 040 400ms 100 1 000ms 1 second 4 The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned INTERCHARACTER 6 50 Magellan 8300 8400 Scale Features Remote Display Enable Disable The scanner scale can be configured to operate with or wi
268. nd up NOTE To specify the RS 232 Baud Rate 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the desired baud rate from the bar codes below and on the immediately following pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code RS 232 BAUD RATE 1200 RS 232 BAUD RATE 2400 6 96 Magellan 8300 8400 RS 232 Features RS 232 Baud Rate continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan RS 232 BAUD RATE 4800 RS 232 BAUD RATE 9600 Product Reference Guide 6 97 RS 232 Baud Rate continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan RS 232 BAU E 19200 D RAT RS 232 BAUD RATE 38400 6 98 Magellan 8300 8400 RS 232 Features RS 232 Baud Rate continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan RS 232 BAUD RATE 57600 Product Reference Guide 6 99 AUD RATE RS 232 Number of Data Bits Specifies number of data bits required for sending and receiving data 8 data bits with 2 stop bits and parity enabl
269. nection 8 N C No Connection 9 GND Signal Ground 10 N C No Connection Product Reference Guide Auxilliary Port External Handheld Input Connector Hardware RJ45 10 Position Cable Pinout Table B 5Auxilliary Port Cable Pinouts PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION 1 5V pullup 5V pullup 2 CTS in Clear To Send input 3 N C No Connection Reserved 4 RTS out Request To Send output 5 RxD in Receive Data Input 6 TxD out Transmit Data output T N C No Connection 8 5V out 500mA max 5V out 9 GND Signal Ground 10 N C No Connection Magellan 8300 8400 Power Cable Power Cable Connector Hardware 3 pin Molex Cable Pinout Table B 6Power Cable Pinouts PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION 1 EARTH GND Earth Ground 2 SIGNAL GND Signal Ground 3 12V IN 12V in Product Reference Guide Remote Display Connector Hardware 4 pin SDL Cable Pinout Table B 7Remote Display Cable Pinouts PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION 1 12V OUT 12V out 2 LINE_A_DSPLY LINE A Display 3 LINE_B_DSPLY LINE B Display 4 GND Ground MagellanTM 8300 8400 EAS Comm Port Sensormatic systems ON EAS Comm Port Sensormatic systems ONLY EAS Deactivator Control Box Connection Connector Hardware RJ4 Cable Pinout Table B 8 EAS Port Cable Pinouts PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION 1 GND GND 2 5V Out
270. ner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired label length The selectable range for this option is 001 to 050 Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 001 050 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET CODE 93 Product Reference Guide 6 339 Code 93 Length 2 Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode or the second fixed length if in fixed length mode see Code 93 Length Control Length includes the barcode s check and data characters To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET CODE 93 LENGTH 2 below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired label length A setting of 000 will ignore this length only one fixed length otherwise the selectable range for this option is 001 to 050 Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 001 050 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET CODE 9 3 LENGTH 2 6 340 Magellan 8300 8400 Code 93 Enable Code 93 Correla
271. ng Mode Depending upon its current programming the scanner may emit a beep or beeps indicating it has read the bar code and the scanner top green LED will flash on and off slowly while the scan ner remains in Programming Mode Normal scanning functions are disabled Scan the programming bar code s that is are specially encoded to make the desired changes With few exceptions the scanner will emit a triple beep each time you scan a valid programming bar code Not all features are available for all interfaces and the scanner will sound an error tone when scanning programming bar codes for features invalid to the current interface Only features supported by the currently active interface will be implemented If a bar code is scanned that changes the scanner s interface all previous configuration items scanned in the programming session are lost Additionally when programming a feature reguiring you to scan single digits to set a multi digit number such as Minimum Label Length scan ning the SWITCH bar code or any item tag item value bar code before completing all input will result in an error tone and cause the scanner to exit Programming Mode Under these circumstances the current feature you were trying to set is thrown out any previous bar codes scanned dur ing the session will take effect 1 Some features such as Minimum Label Length require you to select the label s length by scan ning a series of single digi
272. ng a paper towel or lint free cleaning tissues dampened with a mild water based glass cleaner DO NOT use abrasive cleaners or pads 6 Re install the platter Vertical Scan Window replacement is now complete 3 14 Magellan 8300 8400 Operational Maintenance Horizontal Scan Window Replacement WRG Wear Resistant Glass WRG horizontal scan windows are replaceable and can be removed and replaced following the instructions below Sapphire glass does not require replacement so it is permanently fastened in place Do not attempt to remove Sapphire glass from the platter NOTE 1 Remove the Platter from the scanner as shown in Figure 3 4 2 Turn the platter upside down on a clean dry surface and remove the two screws shown in Figure 3 6a Retain the screws for later re installation 3 Tilt the Window Retainer up and away from the platter as shown 4 Lift out the Window Gasket and WRG Window from the Platter as shown in Figure 3 6b and carefully dispose of any damaged glass 5 Position the new WRG Window and its gasket as shown in Figure 3 6b 6 Guide the Window Retainer to seat its edge under the tabs and match the screw holes as shown in Figure 3 6a 7 Secure the retainer in position using the original two screws 8 Clean both sides of the new WRG window using a paper towel or lint free cleaning tissues dampened with a mild water based glass cleaner DO NOT use abrasive cleaners or pads 9 Re install
273. ng distance of the average oper ator 2 Cut the opening in the countertop Reference Table 2 1 to find the cut out dimensions for your model Flange and shelf mount dimen sions are provided for your convenience 2 12 Magellan 8300 8400 Counter Cutout 3 Install the AC DC Power Supply the Remote Scale Display cable if Remote Display is used and the interface cable s observing the fol lowing Interface cables and display cable if applicable should be routed away from all highly inductive electrical devices like motors and conveyor belts and even away from the unit s power cable if possible Cables should be easy to remove in the event that replace ment is required A little planning now will save a lot of frus tration later 4 Connect and verify all system operations The scanner should be installed so that leading and trailing edges of the L Platter are flush with the countertop to enhance smooth slide through scanning reference the insert in Figure 2 7 Keep in mind that the debris chutes on both sides of the platter provide the necessary clearance for proper scale operation if you are installing a scanner scale you won t need to provide an additional gap for that Table 2 1 Cut Out Dimension References MODEL s TYPE FLANGE SHELF OPTION DIMENSIONAL REFERENCE 8301 8401 Short Scanner Shelf Figure 2 8 a ome eme Manso i ES Faure 24 E
274. ng pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code EE It is important to note that the default for this feature is the Slightly More Aggressive setting For default settings for other features see Appendix F NOTE 6 206 Magellan 8300 8400 EAN 8 Enable EAN 8 Decoding Levels continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan DING LEVELS VERY CONS DING LEVELS SLIGHTLY MORE AGG Product Reference Guide 6 207 EAN 8 Decoding Levels continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan EAN 8 DECODING LEVELS MODERATELY AGGRESSIVE CODING LEVELS VERY AGGRESSIVE 6 208 Magellan 8300 8400 EAN 8 Enable EAN 8 Minimum Reads Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an EAN 8 label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following page
275. ng the SWITCH bar code Product Reference Guide 6 297 SET EAN 128 LABEL ID Interleaved 2 of 5 I 2 of 5 Enable Enables disables the ability of the scanner to decode Interleaved 2 of 5 labels To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code 2 OF 5 DISABLE 2 OF 5 ENABLE 6 298 Magellan 8300 8400 Interleaved 2 of 5 I 2 of 5 Enable I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation Enables disables calculation and verification of an optional Interleaved 2 of 5 check character If check character calculation is disabled the risk is increased that a misread can occur When disabled any check characters in a bar code are treated as data characters NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code I 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION DISABLE CHECK CHARACTE
276. ngle OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Productivity Index Reporting PIR Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Cashier Training CT Green LED Idle State On dim On dim On dim On dim On dim On dim Product Reference Guide F 1 RS 232 Wincor Keybd RS 232 Single Wedge IBM OEM USB Nixdorf Cable Power up Beep Con trol 1 beep 1 beep 1 beep 1 beep 1 beep 1 beep Good Read Beep Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Control Good Read Beep Medium Medium Medium Medium Medium Medium Frequency Good Read Beep 80ms 80ms 80ms 80ms 80ms 80ms Length Good Read Beep Volume High High High High High High Good Read When to After After After After After After Indicate decode decode decode decode decode decode Scale Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable 3 non 3 non 3 non 3 non Scale Enforced Zak zero for 4 zero for 4 Disable zero for 4 zero for 4 Return i minutes minutes minutes minutes RS 232 RS 232 Scale Interface Type SASI SASI Scale Calibration panes Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Notification Scale Intercharacter No delay No delay Delay Remote Display Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable EAS Active State Low Low Low Low Low Low EAS Timeout 20ms 20ms 20ms 20ms 20ms 20ms Maximum Host Transmitted Mes No limit No limit No limit No limit No limit No limit sage Length
277. ngth 1 and Code 39 Length 2 When using variable length stitching it is important to enable Code 39 NOTE Check Character Calculation to prevent misreads H CONTROL VARIABL 6 274 Magellan 8300 8400 NGTH CONTROL Code 39 Enable Code 39 Length 1 Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode or the first fixed length if in fixed length mode see Code 39 Length Control Length includes the barcode s check and data characters To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET CODE 39 LENGTH 1 below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired label length The selectable range for this option is 001 to 050 Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 001 050 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET CODE 39 LENGTH 1 Product Reference Guide 6 275 Code 39 Length 2 Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode or the second fixed length if in fixed length mode see Code 39 Length Control Length includes the barcode s check and data characters To set this featu
278. ning programming labels for features invalid to the current interface group e Symbology Programming gives the scanner the capability to autodiscriminate as few as one and as many as all available symbol ogies For optimal scanner performance enable only those symbolo gies required Additionally the scanner may be programmed with the standard options available for the various symbologies such as check digit minimum label length fixed and variable length bar codes etc If you experience difficulties have questions or require additional infor mation contact your local distributor or call your dealer or sales represen tative Product Reference Guide 6 3 Programming Overview NOTE The scanner s programmable feature settings can be modified to accom modate your system s unique requirements These settings can be commu nicated to the scanner in one of three ways 1 Commands can be sent directly from the host A limited set of host commands are available Refer to Appendix D for more details or contact Tech Support 2 Programming bar code labels can also be used to modify the scan ner s programmable settings This manual provides the bar code labels and instructions necessary to configure the scanner s features and options When you program the scanner using any of the methods above the scanner will store the changes until reprogrammed or returned to factory defaults Programming via Handhel
279. nsmis sion Three standard options are available below Contact your dealer for other alternate settings for this feature e No Global Suffix e CR Carriage Return e CRLF Carriage Return Line Feed To set the Global Suffix 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code GLOBAL SUFFIX NO GLOBAL SUFFIX 6 84 Magellan 8300 8400 Interface Related Features Global Suffix continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan GLOBAL SUFFIX CR Product Reference Guide 6 85 GLOBAL SUFFIX CR LF Case Conversion Changes the case of all alphabetic characters to upper or lower case Choices are e No case conversion e Upper case e Lower case To configure this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the case conversion bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code 6 86 Magellan 8300 8400 ONVERSION NO CASE CONVERSI
280. nsure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code STITCHING CODE 128 STITCHING ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6 293 Code 128 Minimum Reads Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Code 128 label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming seguence by scanning the SWITCH bar 1 8 MINIMUM READS code 6 294 MagellanTM 8300 8400 MINIMUM Code 128 Enable Code 128 Minimum Reads continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 128 MINIMUM 128 MINIMUM Product Reference Guide 6 295 EAN 128 Enable Enables disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN 128 labels When disabled EAN128 labels are transmitted in Code128 data format When enabled EAN128 labels are transmitted in EAN128 data format To set this feature 1 Scan the S
281. ntend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code RS 232 IGNORE HOST COMMANDS NORMAL DO NOT IGNORE HOST COMMANDS RS 232 IGNORE HOST COMMANDS ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6 111 RS 232 TTL Specifies whether RS 232 interface provides TTL levels on the output pins TxD and RTS Choices are e Normal RS 232 levels e TTL levels To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for this feature You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code 232 LEVELS NORMAL RS 6 112 Magellan 8300 8400 232 LEVELS TTL RS 232 Features RS 232 TTL Invert Enables disables inversion of TTL To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for this feature You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH RS 232 TTL INVERT NO INVE
282. nterface See Chapter 6 Interface Type to select the required interface using programming bar codes See Chapter 6 Programming for details about configuring the scanner using programming bar codes Unplug unit and call technical support personnel Unplug unit and call technical support personnel Call technical support personnel Call technical support personnel Unplug unit and call technical support personnel See the topic Scale Error Reporting in this chapter for problem identification and corrective actions Connect the Remote Display If necessary replace display or cable Alternatively you can disable the Remote Display using the program ming procedures described inChapter 6 Check to see if either of the buttons is stuck free it if possible If neither button is stuck call technical support personnel Call technical support personnel Calibrate scale or call technical support personnel Call technical support personnel If not lit call technical support personnel a If only one laser is non functional the scanner may continue to work this is a configurable feature however the 7 segment display will show the error code indicating the failed laser If both lasers have failed the 7 segment display will display either a 4 or a 5 and the scanner will cease to function until serviced No alternate blinking of lamps will occur if only one laser has failed 4 4 Magellan 8300 8400 Error Codes Figur
283. nused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type since you can cause damage to the scanner and or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface ALWAYS make interface selections with the host CAUTION cable DISCONNECTED ERFACE TYPE RS 232 WINCOR NIXDO 6 58 Magellan 8300 8400 Interface Related Features RS 232 Single Cable Interface Selection Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type since you can cause damage to the scanner and or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED gt CAUTION Single cable installations require connection at the POS Terminal host port The Scale Host port connection is not used for this interface NOTE E TYPE RS 232 SING 6 59 Product Reference Guide OEM USB Interface Selection Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type sinc
284. o cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type since you can cause damage to the scanner and or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface ALWAYS make interface selections with the host CAUTION cable DISCONNECTED E TYPE KEYBOAR 6 68 Magellan 8300 8400 Interface Related Features Keyboard Wedge E Interface Selection Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type since you can cause damage to the scanner and or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface ALWAYS make interface selections with the host CAUTION cable DISCONNECTED E TYPE KEYBOAR 6 69 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Wedge F Interface Selection Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type since you can cause damage to the scanner and or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface ALWAYS make interface selections with the host CAUTION cable DISCONNECTED Magellan
285. o previous settings 4 Maintain a good record of all changes made to ensure that you know if the original factory settings have been changed 1 Exception If an interface bar code had been read while in Programming Mode the scanner will operate on the default settings for the new interface Product Reference Guide 6 7 Programming Sequence To modify a scanner feature item the programming bar codes contained in this manual must be scanned in a given sequence depending upon the feature being programmed as shown in Table 6 1 There are three possi ble programming sequences If the scanner s interface type must be changed always be sure that interface configuration is the FIRST item scanned during a programming session Selecting an interface type resets ALL other configuration items to the fac tory default for that interface type A C Programming sample A the most commonly used format demon strates how three bar codes are scanned in sequence to do the follow ing 1 Place the scanner in Programming Mode SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the Item Tag that will enable the new feature 3 End the programming session and reset the scanner SWITCH bar code Sample B provides an example of a programming feature requiring the entry of a range value Like sample A the scanner is placed in Programming Mode and an Item Tag is scanned Then a value must be entered before ending the programming session I
286. ode symbology type See Appendix D Default Settings for a listing for common symbologies It can be appended previous to or following the transmitted barcode data depend ing upon how this option is enabled This feature provides options for configuring custom Label IDs individually per symbology If you wish to program the scanner to always include an industry standard label identi fier for ALL symbology types see the previous feature AIM ID The Label ID is a customizable code of up to three ASCII characters each of which are 00 FF followed by a control character 00 01 This control character when set to zero does nothing When set to one it appends the symbology s AIM ID to the Label ID When the conirol character is set to 01 for UPC A and UPC E it expands the label to EAN 13 and thus follows the EAN 13 Label ID settings Label IDs cannot be modified when using the OEM USB interface To configure a Label ID 1 Scan the START barcode 2 Select Label ID position as either BEFORE or AFTER by scanning the appropriate barcode 3 Determine the desired character s you may choose up to three which will represent the Label ID for the selected symbology Next turn to the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual and find the equivalent hex digits associated with your choice of Label ID For example the default Label ID for Code 39 for the Single Cable RS 232 interface is B 1 To change it to R 4
287. odel 8303 8305 8403 8405 Long Flanged If leveling feet are needed use the placement shown here represented with plus signs 0 375 Model 8303 8305 8403 8405 0 952cm gt Supports 0 75 20 00 1 9 om 50 8cm V M gg 13 0 mm y v Ir 4 0 TN DIT 10 2 cm Liquid 1 9cm Drainage 18 625 gt Liquid 47 3cm Drainage Figure 2 17 Long Flanged Models 8303 8305 8403 8405 Scanner Reference Dimensions Model 8303 8305 8403 8405 Long i Scanner Reference Dimensions 1 0 9 27 2 54cm lt 23 6cm x 0 2cm i 4 08 10 36cm 0 15cm 9 5 24 13cm 17 75 45 1cm 0 15cm 11 5 29 21cm x 0 1cm 4 59 11 7cm i 5 19 13 2cm 1 125 2 857cm Product Reference Guide 2 19 Checkstand Mounting NOTE There are a number of things to take into account when installing the unit into a checkstand Key factors are ergonomic worker safety loading capac ity and stability Consider the scanner or scanner scale s weight when cal culating the robustness of construction needed to support it as well as maximum capacity of weighed and scanned items If you choose to rout a countertop with a thickness of 0 75 1 9 cm plywood you ll need to add a backing strip that supports the area routed out for the su
288. oed ang The scanner is ready for operation Scanning is immediately available Normal Mode Good Read Scanner Green LED bright flash Indicates a bar code has been read and decoded Indication Scanner Green LED Continuous flashing nme Ow Program Mode Indication Indicates the scanner is in Label Programming Mode Cycle power to exit Programming Mode A 2 Magellan 8300 8400 Controls and Indicators Table A 1 Scanner and Scale LED Indications LED INDICATION DURATION COMMENT The scanner motor and or laser have automati ae p nm Scanner Green LED flashes slowly cally switched off and the unit has entered Sleep Indication B B B B a D ey Mode due to extended inactivity Scanner Green LED 1 second off 1 Host Disabled 10 second on Host has disabled scanning UD D D OD DoD OO U oU oU Audible low tone 1 second Serves notice that a fatal FRU failure has been Field Replace detected Consult Error Codes in Chapter 4 for able Unit FRU Alternating Scanner Scale Green more details If a low tone is heard but continuous Warning Error Yellow LEDs flash continuously flashing is not observed the scanner can still func Mode cs pm tion in a limited capacity Call systems support for C7 E73 E73 service in either case Scanner Green LED flashes a coded sequence in concert with the Occurs ONLY upon Volume Tone button push fol FRU Indica
289. of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET BOOKLAND LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6 193 EAN 8 Enable Enables disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN JAN 8 labels To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code EAN 8 DISABLE EAN 8 ENABLE 6 194 Magellan 8300 8400 EAN 8 Enable EAN 8 Check Character Transmission Enables disables transmission of an EAN JAN 8 check character To set this feature L Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code 8 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION DISABLE 8
290. ollowing pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming seguence by scanning the SWITCH bar A MINIMUM READ code A MINIMUM READ 6 170 Magellan 8300 8400 UPC A Enable UPC A Minimum Reads continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 UPC A MINIMUM READS A MINIMUM READ Product Reference Guide 6 171 UPC E Enable Enables disables the ability of the scanner to decode UPC E labels To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code UPC E DISABLE UPC E E 6 172 Magellan 8300 8400 UPC E Enable UPC E Number System Character Transmission Enables disables transmission of a UPC E number system character To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page
291. on is any hex value from 00 to FF Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET UPC A LABEL ID 6 166 Magellan 8300 8400 UPC A Enable UPC A 2 Digit Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies a UPC A 2 Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data E The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET UPC A 2 DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET UPC A 2 DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
292. only Scale connection may be handled through POS Terminal port 2 34 Magellan 8300 8400 Set Up amp Installation Installation 1 Make sure that all cables are firmly attached except that the AC DC power supply should not be connected to the AC outlet yet Reference Figure 2 6 and Figure 2 25 2 Remove the platter to gain access to the interior lift handle Grasp the platter in the positions shown in Figure 2 26 and gently lift it from the scanner If the top edge of the platter is blocked you may find it easier to grasp the platter vertical bezel as shown in Figure 2 26b E Figure 2 26 illustrates an L shaped weigh platter which features a vertical bezel Your platter may not contain a vertical bezel NOTE Figure 2 26 Removing the Platter Obstruction Product Reference Guide 2 35 3 Rotate the Interior Lift Handle up as shown in Figure 2 29 and hook the fingers of both hands in the lift handles indicated DO NOT attempt to lift the unit using the plastic edges scale frame or any features other than the lift handles Figure 2 27 Using the Lift Handles Interior Lift Handle Rear Lift Handle 4 Lower the unit into the counter opening ensuring that none of the cables are pinched pierced or crimped 5 View the bubble level i present located on the scanner s spider assembly to ensure the scanner is level As shown in Figure 2 28 the air bubble sh
293. ontinuous scanning of labels is allowed permitting the user to scan an unlimited number of bar codes while troubleshooting problems Under normal operation the scanner stores label data awaiting the signal which transmits it to the host When the scanner is not connected to a host it may read and store only up to two labels then quit reading until power is cycled clearing the memory This mode of operation removes this limitation To place the scanner in Scanner Diagnostic Mode press the Volume Tone top Push Button for approximately four seconds While pressing the button the scanner will first sound three tones wait a few seconds then sound six rapid tones after which you should immediately release the but ton While in Scanner Diagnostic Mode identification numbers for interface type firmware and configuration will scroll continually across the scan ner s 7 segment FRU Field Replaceable Unit display This is useful infor mation for field diagnostics See Figure 4 1 for the location of the display For example if the dual cable RS 232 interface type 05 were enabled the firmware designation was R96 1234 and the configuration was R96 5593 the following would be shown slowly with blanking between each of the items IF 05 196 1234 196 5593 To exit Scanner Diagnostic Mode cycle power to the unit or press and hold the Volume Tone Push Button for eight seconds to reset the scanner See Chapter 3 Scanner and Scale Rese
294. or operation These steps include Power Up Selftest Error Reporting and Operational Con figuration Power Up Selftest Power Up Selftest begins when power is applied The scanner s software immediately begins the testing seguence to verify that all systems are func tioning properly This routine which only takes a few seconds checks all the functions of the scanner EAS deactivation system scale remote scale display and interface prior to indicating that it is ready for operation A tone indicating Selftest is complete is a configurable feature See the topic Power up Beep Control in the Programming chapter of this manual Product Reference Guide 3 5 Error Reporting If a fatal error is detected during Selftest or operation the unit will not advance to Normal Operation Mode Selftest diagnostics will cause the unit to sound a long low tone and or display an error message on the 7 segment display indicating where the failure occurred These messages are coded to assist the repair technician in identifying the failed component If an error is indicated make note of it and contact your supervisor or technical support representative A table containing descriptions of these error codes is included in Chapter 4 Problem Isolation If a non fatal error is detected such as the loss of one of the two lasers the unit will sound a long low tone and display a number on the 7 seg ment display The unit will advance to Norma
295. ost Corimatds cei seres d eU SNO Pes eoccon DYN PR ER IMIKDSUPPUT GOG A RMDAUNE 6 111 RO 232 Tlie Rai daa did tv da IM EUER ML CD GAA bla dO in id God Gen 6 112 RS 232 TEL INVER see GI GU o GG Ed i Sh D ME CER TG UR DN EE 6 113 RS 232 ICE DCL Character Delay Enable iiiios iecit ione en Tri Col e ens noh YET Ei 6 114 RSs232 Team POS TCL Scale i atro sy Hy GO DOD GN yy FAS lyf a DA Ff PEE 6 115 RS 232 Beep on ASCU BEL 35 5 0 0 MER ERI FOUR EE AR RE Tn GOLN OER AMI UO UE UR NNUS bh NDS 6 116 RS 232 Beep After Weiglll uu iei ui Gwi O uq uid Si LG tA MINA bus GEG dw CHE 6 117 RS 232 Beep on Not On File seen ii GRAA REESE A CGU ATRIIS a a 6 118 RS 232 ACK NAK Enable 25 opo ttn usur ta sanas qu ad GN Gy DO HF HE GY s ence uc Gw FE UE 6 119 RS 232 ACK Character cii au OR Gwn iy GT o iY DEFI dyi Dd i iy y Fi 6 121 RS 232 NAK Charactel 2 5 ir eet ob EF RO FR Ree A Rd ddd iA LEE FRO A IO DUR RR RUN MERE EE 6 122 RS 232 Retry on ACK NAK Tirmeout alien DEG CRUG GN ND O LEAF GRY 6 123 RS 232 ACK NAK Timeout Value cein GU be REOR R Tex GA A FFO Nu O UD Gi 6 124 RS 232 ACK NAK Retry COUR ctsasictanconstcaretsannsadinenneruitduatenaliadetesshamacumenmmbetunaadasdeds 6 125 RS 232 ACK NAK Error Fandliig ee YDD DOR ee RW HR dy O Ffr 6 126 RS 232 Indicate Transmission FailUl amp x ane ace erint ri ht bii em RR i CDd GYNFI 6 128 Single Cable RS 232 Options He YG a aa tb niue Mele DR GDG MEDE 6 129 Single Cable RS 232 Scanner Only Protocol een ui GG
296. ould appear fully within the circle indicated The air bubble can touch the circle but must not overlap it Apply shims beneath the scanner bottom or adjust the shelf to allow level installa tion 1 The bubble level is present only on certain models 2 36 Magellan 8300 8400 Set Up amp Installation Figure 2 28 Using the Bubble Level Models vary and may not contain a bubble level OK OK NO pubbleLevel Jp sd 6 Re install the Platter and verify that it is flush or just below flush with the countertop This is necessary to provide smooth scanning from either direction Make adjustments as needed to align the plat ter with the counter by moving support rails up or down or con sider installing screws in positions that will allow their use in adjusting the unit s position Ensure that leveling is maintained if adjustments are made Failure to install a scanner scale in a stable and level position will inhibit weighing calibration and zeroing operations The platter MUST make unob structed contact with all of its supports for proper weighing operation NOTE 7 Once installation is complete proceed with the Operational Veri fication procedures that follow Product Reference Guide 2 37 Figure 2 29 Adaptive Scale Platter Option Some Platters have been shipped with installed spacers on their undersides at all fo
297. ow medium or high fre quency controls the beeper s pitch tone e Low 660 Hz e Medium 860 Hz High 1050 Hz To set the Good Read Beep Frequency 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the three bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code OOD READ BEEP FREQUENCY LOW Product Reference Guide 6 35 Good Read Beep Frequency continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan D BEEP FREQUENCY 6 36 Magellan 8300 8400 EAD BEEP FREQUENC Indication Features Good Read Beep Length Specifies the duration of a good read beep To set the good read beep length l 2 Scan the SWITCH bar code Scan the bar code SET GOOD READ BEEP LENGTH You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired good read beep length setting The selectable range is 1 255 which is the timeout in 10 millisecond increments Pad
298. pair as one label To set this feature l 2 Scan the SWITCH bar code Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code iz Contact Customer Support for details about advanced programming for this fea ture N TWO LABEL COMBINED TRANSMISSION DIS EAN TWO LABEL COMBINED TRANSMISSION ENABLE 6 224 Magellan 8300 8400 Other UPC EAN Options UPC EAN Guard Insertion Enables Disables the ability of the scanner to insert either a missing lead ing or trailing guard on an otherwise complete UPC A EAN 13 segment it has received To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code N GUARD INSERTION N GUARD INSERTION ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6 225 UPC EAN Stitch Exact Label Halves When enabled this a
299. pendix C that rep resent the desired label length A setting of 000 will ignore this length only one fixed length otherwise the selectable range for this option is 001 to 080 Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 001 080 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET COD Product Reference Guide 6 291 TH 2 E 128 LENG Code 128 Correlation This feature enables disables character correlation for Code 128 To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code CORRELAT 6 292 Magellan 8300 8400 E 128 CORRELATION Code 128 Enable Code 128 Stitching Enables disables stitching for Code 128 labels When parts of a Code 128 bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner s software and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met To set this feature Scan the SWITCH bar code It 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to e
300. pport flanges see Figure 2 6 This support strip should minimally be made of 0 75 1 9 cm thick plywood and be approximately 4 0 10 2 cm wide and 14 0 35 6 cm long This strip should be glued as well as screwed to the underside of the countertop Checkstand Vibration Proper function of the scanner scale is dependent upon an installation which minimizes excess vibration from conveyor belts fans and other such eguipment See Chapter 4 Scale Error Reporting if vibration is suspected of causing operational problems Installation Overview The preceding Site Preparation Overview dealt with installed location and counter preparations to accommodate the scanner or scanner scale Having completed those steps physical installation of the scanner or scan ner scale can begin The following instructions apply to all models This chapter describes 1 Unpacking the unit 2 Verifying operation before connecting to a POS system 3 Routing and connecting cables 4 Validating that your scanner communication parameters match the POS terminal s system requirements 5 Confirming connection to the optional EAS system 2 20 Magellan 8300 8400 Installation Overview 6 Functional testing to verify operation when connected to the POS system The following text describes each of these steps Unpacking To unpack the unit e Inspect the package for signs of damage that may have occurred dur ing shipping I
301. propriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET CODE 128 LABEL ID 6 288 Magellan 8300 8400 Code 128 Enable Code 128 Length Control This feature specifies whether variable length or fixed length decoding will be set for Code 128 To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code iz You must now set the features Code 128 Length 1 and Code 128 Length 2 CODE 128 LENGTH CONTROL VARIABLE LENGTH NOTE CODE 128 LENGTH CONTROL FIXED LENGTH
302. r Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code Product Reference Guide 6 177 SET UPC E LABEL ID UPC E 2 Digit Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies a UPC E 2 Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data 7 The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature Ju 2 Scan the SWITCH bar code Scan the bar code SET UPC E 2 DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FE Co
303. rce of air that provides adequate cooling by convective air flow DO NOT place the scanner in a close fitting fully enclosed checkstand Pro vide a MINIMUM of 16 square inches 103 2 square centimeters of air intake from below the installation for sufficient convective cooling If motors conveyor belts or other heat producing equipment are located near the scanner forced air ventilation may be required In most installa tions a 30 cfm 84 cmm axial fan should provide sufficient air move ment Ifa ventilation fan is installed one with a removable filter that may be washed or replaced is recommended Figure 2 5 Debris Chutes amp Ventilation Slots Spider Assembly Present only in scale models Product Reference Guide 2 9 Service Access The scanner and scanner scale have been engineered to allow performance of all routine service and maintenance such as zeroing and calibration without removing the scanner from the checkstand Additionally all cable connections made at the scanner can be connected and removed while the unit is sitting on the countertop The installer should provide service access to all remaining cable connectors as well as the AC DC Power Sup ply if installed Power Installation Grounding Plug your scanner into an electrical outlet that has been wired to meet all applicable electrical codes laws and regulations and has a common ground with the Point of Sale terminal The
304. re 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET CODE 39 LENGTH 2 below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired fixed label length A setting of 000 will ignore this length only one fixed length otherwise the selectable range for this option is 001 to 050 Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 001 050 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code ENGTH 2 SET CODE 39 L 6 276 Magellan 8300 8400 Code 39 Enable Code 39 Correlation This feature enables disables character correlation for Code 39 To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code CORRELATION Product Reference Guide 6 277 CORRELATION Code 39 Stitching Enables disables stitching for Code 39 labels When parts of a Code 39 bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled the bar code parts will be assembled by th
305. re powering on the scan ner NOTE 5 Connect the Remote Display cable if your model is a scanner scale and make any connections to optional equipment such as a hand held scanner Product Reference Guide 2 39 6 Power up the scanner or scanner scale by connecting the power cord to an AC power outlet Wait for the unit to complete the Self test routine 10 seconds maximum Successful scanner power up is sig nified by any or all of the following Facet wheel shows movement Lasers turn on Status LED s turn on Speaker sounds tone s Remote display if present shows message A single red dot is visible on the 7 segment display 7 Power up the POS terminal Verify that scanning deactivation and weighing functions are operational and that data is properly com municated between the scanner and your POS system Scan deac tivate and weigh a few items If problems are encountered refer to Chapter 4 Problem Isolation 8 You have now completed installation and system integration of the scanner or scanner scale At this point the scale must be calibrated and certified in accordance with the requirements of your state and or local requirements Refer to Chapter 5 Calibration for cali bration procedures 2 40 Magellan 8300 8400 Chapter 3 Operation and Maintenance The information contained in this chapter describes how to operate and maintain the scanner and optional scale and EAS systems
306. re reading the same label again e g two identi cal items in succession To set the Double Read Timeout 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code If the incidence of multiple reads is not acceptable increase the Double Read Timeout setting to a higher value DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT 400ms NOTE DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT 600ms 6 14 Magellan 8300 8400 General Scanner Features Double Read Timeout continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT 800ms DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT 1 SECOND Product Reference Guide 6 15 Laser Timeout The laser timeout feature sets the time for switching the visible laser diodes VLDs off if the scanner is idle Using this feature can prolong the life of the VLDs To set the Laser Timeout 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You
307. re that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code 12 of 5 Stitching operates using fixed lengths ONLY 2 of 5 Length 1 and or 2 of 5 Length 2 must be properly configured for stitching to work I 2 OF 5 STITCHING DISABLE NOTE I 2 OF 5 STITCHING ENABLE 6 306 MagellanTM 8300 8400 Interleaved 2 of 5 I 2 of 5 Enable I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an I 2 of 5 label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code 5 MINIMUM READ Product Reference Guide 6 307 2 5 MINIMUM READS I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan MINIMUM 6 308 Magellan 8300 8400 5 MINIMUM READ St
308. reement End User immediately shall cease using any non embedded software and shall return to Datalogic or destroy all non embedded software covered by this Agreement and shall furnish Datalogic with a certificate of compliance with this provision signed by an officer or authorized representative of End User For embedded software End User agrees to sign a waiver prepared by Datalogic concerning further use of the embedded Software End User s resumed or continued use of the embedded Software after termination shall constitute End User s agreement to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement for such use 11 General Provisions 11 1 Entire Agreement Amendment This document contains the entire agreement between the parties relating to the licensing of the Software and super sedes all prior or contemporaneous agreements written or oral between the parties concerning the licensing of the Software This Agreement may not be changed amended or modified except by written document signed by Datalogic 11 2 Notice All notices required or authorized under this Agreement shall be given in writing and shall be effective when received with evidence of receipt Notices to Datalogic shall be sent to the attention of Contract Administration Datalogic Scanning Holdings Inc 959 Terry Street Eugene OR 97402 or such other address as may be specified by Datalogic in writing 11 8 Waiver A party s failure to enforce any of the terms and condit
309. rence Guide 2 1 Models Scanner and scanner scale models reference Figure 2 1 are available in different lengths allowing them to fit with little or no modification into openings cut for previously installed scanners such as Datalogic Magel lan scanners or NCR scanner models 7820 24 and 7870 Other mod els are designed for applications with smaller footprint requirements Figure 2 1 provides simplified illustrations of short medium and long models The appearance of your unit may vary Scanner scale models also offer an option for a raised Produce Rail or a flip up Produce Bar as shown in Figure 2 3 Figure 2 1 Model Examples Scanner ONLY models Scanner Scale models Model 8301 8401 Short Model 8302 8402 Model 8304 8404 gly Medium Model 8303 8403 Model 8305 8405 Mi Figure 2 2 Flanged and Shelf Model Examples Flange Model Shelf Model Flanges 2 2 Magellan 8300 8400 Pre Installation Considerations Figure 2 3 Produce Bar and Produce Rail Produce Produce Bar Option Rail Option Pre Installation Considerations It should be noted that the scope of this manual does not encompass all factors related to worker safety and checkstand design It does however offer a list of considerations that may be helpful in ensuring greater safety and productivity Careful planning using these general guidelines should result in a more efficient comfortable work environment The U
310. rminal has been switched off or the store system has been reset while the unit is on Reset can also be used to initiate and run the unit s internal Selftest rou tine Pressing and holding the Volume Tone Push Button for approximately eight seconds initiates a reset which is sounded by a rapid number of beeps If the motor had been spinning the lamps will blink while the motor spins down At that point the motor will spin back up and the scanner will continue to run the Selftest diagnostics For more informa tion see the topic Power Up Selftest amp Pre Operation earlier in this chapter Scale Adjustments The scale allows two user adjustments zeroing and calibration The first and most frequently performed is zeroing the scale This operation resets the scale s at rest reading to zero which must be within the range of 0 2 pounds 0 09kg to 0 6 pounds 0 27kg since the last calibration While the at rest reading remains within the zero range the scale will automatically adjust itself to true zero The scale also automatically zeros itself on power up if the weight present on the scale is within these defined limits Zeroing the Scale The zeroing operation may be performed by checkers and other store per sonnel Pressing and releasing the Scale Zero Push Button should return the scale to Normal Operation If the zero point moves out of the zero range due to debris accumulation or other causes pressing
311. s You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code EAN 8 MINIMUM READS 1 NIMU EAN 8 MINI NIMUM READS 2 6 209 Product Reference Guide EAN 8 Minimum Reads continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan EAN 8 MUM READS 3 8 MINI EAN 8 MI READS 4 6 210 Magellan 8300 8400 NIMUM EAN 8 Enable EAN 8 Minimum Segment Length Specifies the minimum number of characters necessary in an EAN 8 JAN 8 label segment in order for the scanner to accept a label for decod ing Selectable from 5 to 15 characters To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code AN 8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH 5 CHARACTERS 8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH 6 CHARAC Product Reference Guide 6 21
312. s and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming seguence by scanning the SWITCH bar code ODE 128 TRANSMIT FUNCTION CHARACTERS DIS 6 286 MagellanTM 8300 8400 RANSMIT FUNCTI ARACTERS ENABLE Code 128 Enable Convert Code 128 to Code 39 Enables disables conversion of Code 128 labels to Code 39 To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code VERT CODE 128 TO CODE 39 CODE 128 TO CODE 39 Product Reference Guide 6 287 Code 128 Label ID This feature specifies a Code 128 label ID to be added to bar code data The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature l 2 Scan the SWITCH bar code Scan the bar code SET CODE 128 LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Scan the ap
313. s between 19 99 and 20 01 3 Remove another 15 0 pounds from the scale and check that the scale reads 5 00 Ib 4 You have completed the Decreasing Load Test Return to Zero Test This test ensures that after all other tests have been completed success fully the scanner scale returns to zero Remove all weights from the scale and verify that the scale reads 0 00 lb After completing this test close the calibration access cover and seal per local Weights and Measures requirements This final step must agree with the legal requirements of your state or local government You have completed the calibration and verification process for weighing in pounds If the scanner scale passes all these tests 1 Remove the weigh platter install the calibration switch cover and install a seal if required 2 Reinstall the weigh platter If the scanner scale fails any of these tests it should be serviced by a quali fied technician 5 10 Magellan 8300 8400 Calibration Verification Kilograms Calibration Verification Kilograms Once you have completed the calibration sequence you may be required to perform these step by step verification procedures These procedures follow the National Institute of Standards and Technology Handbook 44 guidelines for grocery scale installations You may be required by state or local law to have these procedures performed by a certified technician or verified by a proper official Th
314. s to reach to move the products Minimize the width of the input conveyor to reduce the cashier s reach to items on the far side of the belt use a diverter to direct products closer to the cashier Select a design which encourages the cashier to slide products across the scanner rather than gripping and lifting Make sure the horizon tal surface of the scanner is flush with all surrounding surfaces Choose a design which integrates the scanner and scale to eliminate extended reaches and lifts during weighing tasks Provide an easily accessible bag stand at a height 13 17 inches 33 43 2 cm lower than the top surface of the checkstand to reduce stresses to the shoulders elbows and risks associated with lifting products into bags Do not position the bag stand between the cashier and the scanner due to the increased reach involved Position the scanner s horizontal scanning surface 34 36 inches 86 4 91 4 cm above the floor Maintain a minimum of five inches 12 7 cm clearance between elbows and work surfaces Provide adjustable keyboard mounting height tilt and horizontal reach Position the printer cash drawer and other checkstand devices the cashier uses within easy reach less than 18 inches 45 7 cm Provide adeguate toe space foot rests or rails antifatigue mats and where feasible an adjustable seat or stand against which the cashiers can lean 2 4 MagellanTM 8300 8400 Scanner Installation
315. sables calculation and verification of optional MSI Plessey check characters can occur When disabled any check characters in a bar code are treated as y If check character calculation is disabled the risk is increased that a misread data characters NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SI PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION DISABLE MSI PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION 6 346 Magellan 8300 8400 MSI Plessey Enable MSI Plessey Number of Check Characters Specifies number of MSI Plessey check characters to be calculated and verified 7 Check characters are always modulus 10 NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code below representing the desired number of MSI Plessey check characters to be calculated and verified You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code MSI PLESSEY NUMBER 1
316. sainia 6 349 MSI Plessey Length Control Iii enm a RR oou c tu excu Ui Mix Gad NR RUN DN GER VES 6 350 MSI Plessey Length Lena RY Gei tumet be xU RN RENE sue punc u tam du GU DI ES nd DNE UN 6 351 MSI Plessey Length 2 usse quos dcatacadeanwe sopita tenen est tu ees nennt Dini YU la seme ivit sso 6 352 MSI Plessey Correlation anii iY Yes ue oU a HP GG xVE Va SR REP TUE 6 353 MSI Plessey SUEChIng i siae ice sinite i hr tapa rata Mee ri oxi MPa ARGY RED dud LION ARR KR RPM ERE 6 354 MSI Plessey Minimum Reads 55 ioo peti eot FYDR ehh sana seo our rk aa FFE EE Eu a asa SPESE RE 6 355 Appendix A LED Beeper Indications amp Controls A 1 Controls and Indicators 55 2 5 bosses itia DR RR DUO a ete dnNDRENM A GOLF CU DF NOG FREUE LED andiBseepar Indications i buone eibi DU Si Y Re cua Ula Ren dawd REDI RM Mapas Volume Tone Push BUTON ea ia aa trei tn re FUE a GG ic TAS i DDU RE a OG Scale Zero PUSH BUEEON ee Oad a oiv char eheu usine iU ddy G Calibration SWIECH cese nd Gi DS Saw y Fin DH EUN EE n pe iN DENN PR IUE A 2 Appendix B Cable Information eese eere enn BOL Introductio 2r Exi r rope pro OU UU FAR RR RF ER wands CUR DIR QU da DUI NN DEREN FFF SEN CIR DU BI FE General Specification sxxexssscctot tansesa ode resa REN md n DE Sa RR e da O id GG OK eR EE Scanner sisonu PR ISRAPRAIIDUU FWTHYN FFF TH HF THFEFHF AT Y S ER RAM IE E ADF FFF ER ia ETUR RH FN T IBM Cable P
317. scale error code Reference the topic Scale Error Reporting in Section 4 for more information 0 shown on If this is a new installation make sure any foam packing pieces have been removed trom the scale cavity before proceeding Lift off the platter to verify then set the platter back into position ves Check for debris under platter RemoteDisplay Verify that the weigh platter Yellow LED off moves freely Remove item s from scale Press Scale Zero Button If the scale still fails to zero shown on Remote Display YES Yellow LED Flash twice E__4 shown on Remote Display Yellow LED Flash 4 times Problem is Scale Load Cell failure recalibrate the scale Problem is too much motion at power up Correct excess vibration in counter if possible Problem is calibration lost Recalibrate the scale using the procedures in Section 5 Problem is scale communication lost Verify cable connections to from the scale Call Tech Support Call Tech Support Is problem fixed Calibrate scale Is problem fixed Will the scale calibrate Is problem fixed 4 12 MagellanTM 8300 8400 Flowcharts Figure 4 7 Problem Isolation Remote Display REMOTE DISPLAY Scanner scale models that include START a Remote Display when shipped from the factory are configured for use with the display If you re unsure of the settings for your unit conta
318. securely snap it in place see Figure 3 3b Vertical Scan Window replacement is now complete L Platter Vertical Scan Window Removal 1 Grasp the platter as shown in Figure 3 4 and gently lift it from the scanner Figure 3 4 L Platter Removal Reinstallation Obstruction Product Reference Guide 3 13 2 Ifthe top edge of the platter is blocked you may find it easier to use a coin to lift up an edge of the platter as shown in Figure 3 4b then grasp the platter vertical bezel or other exposed edge Scan Windows If cleaning of these windows is necessary use a nonabra sive mild water based glass cleaner and paper towels or lint free cleaning tissues and take care to avoid scratching these windows damage to the win NOTE dows can degrade scanning performance 7 Use caution to avoid damage to the now exposed horizontal and Vertical 3 The Vertical Scan Window is held in place by two tabs each on its top and bottom edges To remove it carefully push out on the top as shown in Figure 3 5 and lift it out Carefully dispose of any dam aged glass Figure 3 5 Vertical Scan Window Removal Replacement L Shaped Vertical Platter Window 4 Fully seat the new Vertical Scan Window into the window channel within its bottom retention tabs Tilt the window in to engage the two tabs at the top of the retainer and carefully snap the window to secure it in place 5 Clean both sides of the new Vertical Scan Window usi
319. sed and installed See the user s manuals and other documentation accompanying that EAS eguipment Scale If the Yellow bottom LED Button is not lit press that button momentarily If the scale is operating correctly the yellow LED will illuminate and remain on steady and the display will show a reading of 0 00 Ib 0 000 kg for metric If the display is blank or a is displayed it may be necessary to calibrate the scale before continuing Refer to Chapter 5 Calibration for calibra tion procedures Remote Scale Display Check to verify that 0 00 Ib 0 000 kg for metric is displayed then place an item on the weighing platter Ver ify that the display shows a weight and that the yellow LED goes out Remove the item and observe that Remote Scale Display shows 0 00 Ib 0 000 kg for metric and that the yellow LED is On 6 Unplug the AC power cord from the outlet and disconnect the power cord and Remote Scale Display cable from the scanner s con nector panel After you have verified that the scanner EAS system and scale if present are completely functional continue with the following procedures to complete the installation 2 24 MagellanTM 8300 8400 Installation Overview Diagnostic Modes Two diagnostic modes are available which allow you to initiate scanner or scale diagnostic tests as well as verify the scanner s ability to read bar codes Scanner Diagnostic Mode While in Scanner Diagnostic Mode c
320. ser modifies the product uses the product in any manner other than as established in the Documentation or if End User breaches any of the provisions of this Agreement 6 2 EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THIS AGREEMENT THE DATALOGIC PRODUCT IS PROVIDED AS IS AND DATALOGIC MAKES NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WRITTEN OR ORAL WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE 7 Infringement 7 1 Datalogic will defend End User against any claim in a lawsuit that the Datalogic Product furnished hereunder infringe a United States patent or copy right of a third party and Datalogic will pay any damages finally awarded against End User by a court of competent jurisdiction that are attributable to such claim or will pay End User s part of any settlement that is attributable to such claim provided that 1 End User notifies Datalogic promptly in writ ing of the claim 2 Datalogic controls the defense or settlement of the claim and 3 End User cooperates fully with Datalogic in such defense or settle ment All notices of a claim should be sent to Datalogic Scanning Holdings Inc Legal Department 959 Terry Street Eugene OR 97402 7 2 In the defense or settlement of any such claim Datalogic may at its option 1 procure for End User the right to continue using the Datalogic Product 2 modify the Datalogic Product so that it becomes non infringing 3 replace
321. sing Most items can be cleared from the debris chutes by carefully running a thin stiff object like a credit card along all sides of the weighing surface If necessary remove the top cover to clear the debris chutes and drip rail Product Reference Guide 3 11 Vertical Scan Window Replacement The Vertical Scan Window is a replaceable part Follow the instructions below to remove and replace a standard or L Platter Vertical Scan Win dow Standard Vertical Scan Window Removal 1 Lift up on the vertical bezel as shown in Figure 3 3a and tilt its top up and away from the scanner as shown in Figure 3 3b Figure 3 3 Removing Reinstalling the Vertical Bezel 2 Press from the opposite side to release the edge of the Vertical Scan Window from the two retention tabs shown in Figure 3 3c 3 Slide the window from the bezel as shown in Figure 3 3d Care fully dispose of any damaged glass 3 12 Magellan 8300 8400 Operational Maintenance 4 Fully seat the new Vertical Scan Window into the window channel engaging it within the retention tabs Reference Figure 3 3d and Figure 3 3c 5 Clean both sides of the new Vertical Scan Window using a paper towel or lint free cleaning tissues dampened with a mild water based glass cleaner DO NOT use abrasive cleaners or pads 6 Tilt in the bezel to seat the two ears at the bottom corners of the bezel into their holes in the scanner and push in on the top of the bezel to
322. sopra enne niii gie IRA rp xe pa 6 311 Standard 2 Of 5 babel ID iiu unico sei dd ae ppp Se DedgnpnmP EN I D PACKED RD UI UR SL INE FYRR Ad 6 312 Standard 2 or 5 Length Control aaa en Ge abod ER MG Eros Mu do CE EFE iu LAC 6 313 Standard 2 r 5 Length T enaa CGGC DR GAE OER RO O EG O Duc Fn I IER Eas 6 314 Standard 2 OF 5 length 2a uu tex degentes e ydh nn de buu iN 6 315 Standard 2 of 5 CorfelatiOfi niuis ros maecenas eanna ra EEN DE ANTE EEEN veas 6 316 Standard 2 Of 5S SuUtehinG sssessssomisia ix ddd RR USA Gi OO EG MER Rd GOG ROD DG RODER REG 6 317 Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads 52 1 iu Goa ducato UR Rd a GA HR Adn 6 318 Codabar Enable us RG LOGO RUN RY DDU DN DDYDD dd a luct RI VEET 6 320 Codabar Start Stop Character TransmisSiOll gt a ER nn Feat alaw ie ke GRE WR nn Y NR glen 6 321 Codabar Start Stop Character Set eiry GI ER aleae D sa BFG Er GYW Y y 6 322 Codabar Start Stop Character Match nisi icnccdcicsetcicescamisatbepsranad e ARRA RI A RR RN RR OR EAR IR 6 324 Codabar Check Character Calculation 521 insons siet GRED GR a bela dames Ad Gadd ddaw 6 325 Codabar Check Character TransmissiOn 5 x Gin NR cR AIR E SPA SE qnc NDRURNDENUNFE ERE 6 326 Codabar Label ID cenid necsniss te saxa px ARR ce ckLa E Dunn IIR XS RG RI de Un a RUG BE RL RS y 6 327 Codabar Require Quiet Zones ce wn vr veste y yT O P RR GREASE PON Y RD DT EAEE 6 328 Codabar Length Control lien bru nia nion LLA GA OII RR E RD RI I IG RS M EDI A NER ED NC Nld RR RR 6 329
323. stitutes valuable trade secrets of Datalogic or Datalogic s third party licensors and that the Software is pro tected by intellectual property laws and treaties The license set forth in this Agreement does not transfer to End User any ownership of Datalogic s or its third party licensors copyrights patents trademarks service marks trade secrets or other intellectual property rights and End User shall have no right to com mence any legal actions to obtain such rights End User shall not remove modify or take any other action that would obscure any copyright trademark pat ent marking or other intellectual property notices contained in or on the Datalogic Product 5 Proprietary Information 5 1 End User acknowledges that Proprietary Information is the confidential proprietary and trade secret property of Datalogic and Datalogic s third party icensors and End User acquires no right or interest in any Proprietary Information 5 2 End User shall not disclose provide or otherwise make available the Proprietary Information of Datalogic or its third party licensors to any person other than End User s authorized employees or agents who are under confidentiality agreement and End User shall not use the Proprietary Informa ion other than in conjunction with use of the Datalogic Product exclusively for End User s internal business purposes End User shall take steps to protect the Proprietary Information no less securely than if it were End User s ow
324. t Length continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan MUM SEGMENT LENGTH 15 CHARACTER 6 216 Magellan 8300 8400 Other UPC EAN Options Other UPC EAN Options The following pages contain other selectable features for UPC EAN sym bologies Price Weight Check In Store Label Minimum Reads Enable EAN Two Label EAN Two Label Minimum Reads Addons Product Reference Guide 6 217 Price Weight Check Enables disables calculation and verification of price weight check digits Applies to all UPC A and EAN JAN 13 labels with eligible Number Sys tem First Character digits Options are e Disable e 4 digit price weight e 5 digit price weight e 4 digit European price weight e 5 digit European price weight To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code PRICE WEIGHT CHECK DISABLE 1 Price Weight Check generally applies to UPC A labels with a Number System Digit of 2 and EAN JAN 13 labels with a First Character of
325. t bar codes A single good read beep is sounded when scanning these single digits in Programming Mode Only the final required digit in the sequence will produce a tri ple beep when scanned indicating a successfully programmed feature Magellan 8300 8400 Programming Overview It is recommended that programming sessions be limited to one feature at a time Should you make a mistake in the programming sequence it can be difficult to discover where an error has been made if several features are pro grammed at once Additionally it can be confusing to determine which fea tures may or may not have been successfully set following such a session 3 Scan the SWITCH bar code to save any new settings and exit Pro gramming Mode The scanner will sound a beep and reset upon exiting Programming Mode and the green LED will return to its usual state on steady or off The scanner will exit Programming Mode under the following con ditions the programming sequence has been completed or the SWITCH bar code is scanned five minutes have passed without scanning activity Any data programmed during the current session will be ignored and the scanner will reset and revert to its condition previous to initiating the exited session power is disconnected Disconnecting power during Pro gramming Mode before scanning the SWITCH bar code will cause all new settings to be ignored On power up the scanner will return t
326. t for more information about unit resets 1 Alisting of scanner interface identification numbers is available in Chapter 6 Programming under the topic Interface Type Product Reference Guide 2 25 Scale Diagnostic Mode To enter Scale Diagnostic Mode press the Scale Zero Push Button for approximately four seconds Six rapid tones will be sounded indicating the unit is leaving normal operation and entering Scale Diagnostic Mode The Remote Display will flash a 1 across the display while the dignostic routine is being run When diagnostics are completed successfully the dis play will indicate that the unit has passed the diagnostic test by displaying pass _ Next the display shows a listing of how many times the unit has been calibrated and zeroed in the form of where x equals the number of times the scale has been calibrated Next the unit will dis play where x is the number of times the scale has been zeroed Finally all segments will be displayed in the form of 18 8 88 to allow visual verification of display function If the diagnostics routine is not completed successfully the scanner will sound a series of tones and the Remote Display will show an error code Turn to Chapter 4 Problem Isolation for a description of error codes Press the Scale Zero Push Button once more to reset the unit and exit Scale Diagnostic Mode See Chapter 3 Scanner and Scale Reset for more information about unit resets Cabl
327. t is accepted as a good read To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming seguence by scanning the SWITCH bar CODE 93 MINIMUM REA code ODE 93 MINIMUM Product Reference Guide 6 343 Code 93 Minimum Reads continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan CODE 93 MINIMUM READS 3 NIM CO 6 344 Magellan 8300 8400 ADS 4 DE 93 MINIMUM RE MSI Plessey Enable MSI Plessey Enable Enables disables the ability of the scanner to decode MSI Plessey labels To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code MSI PLESSEY DISABLE MSI PLESSEY ENABL Product Reference Guide 6 345 MSI Plessey Check Character Calculation Enables di
328. that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code and or Codabar Length 2 must be properly configured for stitching to iz Codabar Stitching operates using fixed lengths ONLY Codabar Length 1 Work NOTE CODABAR STITCHING DISABLE CODABAR STITCHING ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6 333 Codabar Minimum Reads Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Codabar label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming seguence by scanning the SWITCH bar code CODABAR READS 1 MINIMUM CODABAR 6 334 MagellanTM 8300 8400 DS 2 MINIMUM REA Codabar Enable Codabar Minimum Reads continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan CODABAR MINIMUM READS 3 CODABAR Product Reference Guide 6 335 READS 4
329. the Scale Zero Push Button will not reset the zero point In this case the weigh platter must be cleaned debris chutes cleared of debris or the scale must be recal ibrated Product Reference Guide 3 9 With the scanner scale powered up and at operating temperature 1 Remove everything from the weighing surface of the scanner scale 2 Press the Scale Zero Push Button See Figure 1 1 3 The Zero light will turn on and the display will show 0 00 Ib 0 000 kg If it does not see Chapter 4 Problem Isolation 4 You have completed the scale zeroing function Calibrating the Scale The second adjustment calibration defines and sets a standard reference weight range against which all product weights are compared If your scale is set for weighing in pounds this range is 0 30 pounds and if your scale is set for weighing in kilograms the range is 0 15 kilograms The scale must be calibrated upon initial installation whenever the scale cannot be zeroed when the scale diagnostics indicate a calibration error when the weighing measure pounds or kilograms is changed or when the scale module has been replaced Normally once the scale has been calibrated the calibration must be veri fied and or approved by a local regulatory body In many areas of the United States the scale calibration switch must be sealed before being placed into service Consult the agency responsible for regulating weigh ing devices in your area
330. the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired label length A setting of 000 will ignore this length only one fixed length otherwise the selectable range for this option is 003 to 050 Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 003 050 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET COD GTH2 ABAR LEN Product Reference Guide 6 331 Codabar Correlation This feature enables disables character correlation for Codabar To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code CORRELATION CORRELATION 6 332 Magellan 8300 8400 Codabar Enable Codabar Stitching Enables disables stitching for Codabar labels When parts of a Codabar bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner s software and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
331. the platter WRG Window replacement is now complete Product Reference Guide 3 15 Figure 3 6 Removing Replacing the WRG Window L J o E pe o cc MagellanTM 8300 8400 3 16 Chapter 4 Problem Isolation In the event of a suspected functional problem use the troubleshooting references provided in this chapter This useful information will help you to identify and resolve the cause of the problem The scanner scale has a number of features that indicate when a scanner or scale problem occurs The unit may e emit a series of tones light the 7 segment FRU status display e flash one or more LEDs display error codes on the Remote Display if installed Three error reporting modes are used Power Up Selftest Operational tests and Diagnostic tests These test sequences are explained on the fol lowing pages Power Up Selftest The Power up Selftest is a pre operational series of tests that must be suc cessfully completed before the scanner indicates readiness for operation This pre operational period is the time between power up and normal operation during which the motor comes up to speed and software firm ware and hardware are being tested These tests ensure that all subsystems are fully functional before turning on the Visible Laser Diode VLD Refer to Chapter 3 Operational Modes for a more detailed description of this and other scanner and scale modes Product Reference Guide 4 1
332. thout a Remote Display Recalibration recertification may be required when adding a Remote Display y Consult your local Weights and Measures authority NOTE If this feature is enabled the scanner scale will expect that it is connected to a Remote Display and will indicate an error if one is not See Chapter 4 Error Codes for more information E DISPLAY DISA E DISPLAY Product Reference Guide 6 51 EAS Features EAS Active State Specifies the active state polarity of EAS Electronic Article Survellance the inactive state is its opposite polarity EAS output goes active during the good read indication of a bar code allowing the EAS device to deactivate a tag on the product To set the EAS Active State 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code TIVE STATE ACTIVE EAS ACTIVE STATE ACTIVE HIGH 6 52 Magellan 8300 8400 EAS Features EAS Timeout Specifies the amount of time that an EAS Electronic Article Survellance signal is held in its active state for a good read indication To set the EAS Timeout 1 Sc
333. tion speaker lowing a FRU warning Enables service techni 4 4 4 cians to identify FRU failures mE AM EM a Certain functions of the Green and Yellow LEDs are selectable to be enabled or disabled Your scanner may not be programmed to display all indications Volume Tone Push Button The Volume Tone Push Button also performs multiple functions depend ing upon the duration of time it is pressed The Volume Tone Push Button must be configured to enable standard functions or the features described in Table A 2 will not apply Refer A ence Chapter 6 Scanner Button Options for programming details Volume changes made using the Volume Tone Push Button are lost when the scanner is powered down and are reset to the factory default setting If you wish to permanently change the volume use the special programming labels in Chapter 6 Good Read Beep Volume NOTE Product Reference Guide A 3 Table A 2 Volume Tone Push Button Functions PRESS DURATION FUNCTION COMMENT Alternatively the scanner can be awakened by Momentary when Wakes scanner from Sleep Moving an object through the scan zone scanner is asleep Mode A weight change on the scale Scanning with an attached auxiliary scanner Press the push button momentarily to increase speaker volume When the loudest volume is reached a Increments volume repeated press of the push button cycles volume back to the lowest setting
334. tion This feature enables disables character correlation for Code 93 To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code CORRELATION Product Reference Guide 6 341 ORRELATIO Code 93 Stitching Enables disables stitching for Code 93 labels When parts of a Code 93 bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner s software and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan your selection from the bar codes below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code CODE 93 STITCHING DISABLE CODE 93 STITCHING ENABLE 6 342 Magellan 8300 8400 Code 93 Enable Code 93 Minimum Reads Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Code 93 label must be decoded before i
335. to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code BER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSION BER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSIO Product Reference Guide 6 173 UPC E Check Character Transmission Enables disables transmission of a UPC E check character To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code K CHARACTER TRANSMISSION ECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION 6 174 Magellan 8300 8400 UPC E Enable Expand UPC E to UPC A Enables disables expansion of UPC E labels to UPC A To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code PAND UPC E TO UPC A
336. ts to ensure electrical compatibility VOLTAGE FREOUENCY 100 240VAC 10 50 60 Hz Safe operation of your scanner or scanner scale reguires properly grounded electrical outlets Be sure to have a gualified electrician certify the earth ground connection on circuits which will be used to power the unit The scanner is powered on off by connecting disconnecting it from its power supply Product Reference Guide 1 11 Laser and Product Safety N CAUTION Laser safety reguirements are based on IEC Standard Publication 60825 1 2007 and CDRH 21CFR Chapter 1 Subchapter J and CDRH Laser Product Performance Standard User information 1040 10 h 1 e User Maintenance No user maintenance of the laser system other than cleaning of the scan windows is reguired e Radiant Energy The scanner is an IEC Class 1 and CDRH Ila laser product The system uses two embedded Class 3A Visible Laser Diodes VLDs operating at 650 0 nm in an opto mechanical scan ner resulting in less than 3 1uW radiated power as observed through a 7mm aperture averaged over 10 seconds Maximum emit ted output power at the lower sealed window is 880pW pulse duration is 89 pS No attempt should be made by the user to remove the protective housing of the scanner scale e Laser Light Viewing The horizontal and vertical scan windows are the only apertures through which laser light may be observed in this product Exposure to the light
337. uct Reference Guide 6 313 Standard 2 of 5 Length 1 Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode or the first fixed length if in fixed length mode see Standard 2 of 5 Length Con trol Length includes the barcode s check and data characters To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 1 below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired label length The selectable range for this option is 001 to 050 Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three digit entry 001 050 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code 6 314 Magellan 8300 8400 ANDARD 2 OF 5L Standard 2 of 5 Std 2 of 5 Enable Standard 2 of 5 Length 2 Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode or the second fixed length if in fixed length mode see Standard 2 of 5 Length Control Length includes the barcode s check and data characters To set this feature i 2 Scan the SWITCH bar code Scan the bar code SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan
338. up Reference the EAS system manufac turer s instructions for more details 2 Scanner Scale units ONLY If the unit is a scanner scale connect the Remote Scale Display to the proper connector on the unit s connec tor panel refer to Figure 2 22 Note that if the Remote Scale Dis play is not connected a scanner power up Selftest will sound a long low beep and the number 8 will appear on the 7 segment display indicating a remote display error Power down connect a known good Remote Display to the appropriate port and restart to correct this problem Alternatively you can disable the Remote Display using programming bar codes see Chapter 6 Programming for more information 3 Connect the power cable at the scanner then at the AC outlet 2 22 Magellan 8300 8400 Installation Overview When power is applied to the unit the normal indicator sequence is e The scanner indicator top most green LED will be lit dim steadily The 7 segment display will flash the number 8 indicating initial ization e Ifthe Selftest detects a problem the 7 segment display will display a number code Refer to Chapter 4 Problem Isolation for a description of failure codes and problem isolation procedures Scale calibration may be necessary to obtain a zero reading on the display on rare occasions 4 The unit should be permitted to reach thermal equilibrium before proceeding to the next steps Reference the
339. ur corners These specially configured Platters are provided for customers wishing to add an adaptive scale to their unit at a later date Until such time as the adaptive scale is installed the four spacers should be left in place to ensure that the Platter rests evenly at its correct height when positioned on the scanner To remove the spacers loosen and remove the single screw for each as shown in Figure 2 30 Figure 2 30 Removing the Adaptive Scale Spacers Platter configured for Adaptive Scale NF Lig 2 38 Magellan 8300 8400 System Power Up Recap System Power Up Recap The System Power Up procedure may vary depending upon the require ments of your POS system It is generally a good practice to power down switch off all equipment prior to connecting cables Check with your System Supervisor and or refer to your POS terminal manual for proper power down and power up procedures and interface requirements when connecting any peripheral device If you have not identified any specific requirements for your POS system follow these steps 1 Power down the POS terminal 2 Ensure that power is disconnected from the scanner 3 Connect the scanner and scale interface cables to your POS termi nal This connection may use one or two cables depending upon your POS terminal interface 4 EAS units ONLY Connect the EAS interface cable SENSORMATIC EAS SYSTEMS Always Apply power to the EAS Controller box befo
340. used bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan ELECTION Product Reference Guide 6 137 ELECTION Single Cable RS 232 RTS CTS Selection continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan ELECTION 6 138 Magellan 8300 8400 ELECTION Single Cable RS 232 Options Single Cable RS 232 Use BCC Enables disables the ability of the scanner to use BCC To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code ABLE RS 232 USE BCC BLE RS 232 USE Product Reference Guide 6 139 Single Cable RS 232 Use ACK NAK Enables disables the ability of the scanner to use ACK NAK To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan either the enable or disable bar code below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Complete the programming sequence
341. y scanning the SWITCH bar code GTIN DISABLE GTIN ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6 249 GTIN Label ID This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when GTIN conversion is enabled The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET GTIN LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scan ner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their correspond ing Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 1 and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF for each of the two characters 4 Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code 6 250 Magellan 8300 8400 SET GTIN LABEL ID GTIN Enable GTIN 2 Digit Suppl
342. y unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep resent the desired Label ID characters entered as two hex pairs A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character Thus to set a two character value of AB bar codes containing the digits 4 T and 2 must be scanned The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code SET EAN 8 5 DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID 6 204 Magellan 8300 8400 EAN 8 Enable EAN 8 128 Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies an EAN 8 128 Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data The programming feature Label ID Control designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled NOTE To set this feature 1 Scan the SWITCH bar code 2 Scan the bar code SET EAN 8 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below You ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the fac ing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan 3 Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Append

User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents